Fostering Resilience in an Intergenerational Art and LIteracy Program for Homeless Families: An...

204
2013 VSA Intersections: Arts and Special Education A Jean Kennedy Smith Arts and Disability Program Exemplary Programs and Approaches

Transcript of Fostering Resilience in an Intergenerational Art and LIteracy Program for Homeless Families: An...

2013 VSA Intersections: Arts and Special EducationA Jean Kennedy Smith Arts and Disability Program

Exemplary Programs and Approaches

The John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts

David M. Rubenstein Chairman

Michael M. Kaiser President

Darrell M. Ayers Vice President, Education and Jazz

Betty R. Siegel Director, VSA and Accessibility

Editor

Sharon M. Malley, EdD

Editorial reviewers

Beverly Levett Gerber, EdD

Karen T. Keifer-Boyd, PhD

Alice Hammel, PhD

Barbara Pape, EdM

You are welcome to copy and distribute this publication with the following credit:Produced by The John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts, © 2014.

The content of this publication, developed under a grant from the U.S. Department of Education, does not necessarily represent the policy of the U.S. Department of Education. You should not as-

sume endorsement by the federal government.

Acknowledgments and Credits

Authors

Sally Bailey, MFA

Jean B. Crockett, PhD

Rhonda Vieth Fuelberth, PhD

Kim Gavin, MA

Beverly Levett Gerber, EdD

Donalyn Heise, EdD

Veronica Hicks, MA

Lynne Horoschak, MA

Sophie Lucido Johnson

Karen T. Keifer-Boyd, PhD

L. Michelle Kraft, PhD

Linda Krakaur, MSt

Lynda Ewell Laird, MM

Laurie MacGillivray, PhD

Tim McCarty, MA

Mark Tomasic, MFA

Contents

Introduction 5

Sharon M. Malley, Editor

Next Steps: New Research and Teaching Journals 10

at the Intersection of the Arts and Special Education

Beverly Levett Gerber, Karen T. Keifer-Boyd, and Jean B. Crockett

Exemplary Theatre Practices: Creating Barrier-Free Theatre 25

Sally Bailey

Visual Theatre: Building a Bridge for Student Success 46

Tim McCarty

Mastering the Curriculum: Students Framed as Experts 70

Linda Krakaur

Emotional Intelligence Through Art: Strategies for Children with 87

Emotional Behavioral Disturbances

Sophie Lucido Johnson

Fostering Resilience in an Intergenerational Art and Literacy 103

Program for Homeless Families: An Analysis of Curriculum

Donalyn Heise and Laurie MacGillivray

Reflections on Moore College of Art and Design’s Master’s Degree 127

Program in Art Education with an Emphasis in Special Populations

Lynne Horoschak, Kim Gavin, and Veronica Hicks

IDEA Empowerment Through Difference Find Card Strategies 147

Communitarian Approaches to Empowerment

Karen Keifer-Boyd and L. Michelle Kraft

Tools and Stories: Preparing Music Educators for Successful Inclusive 159

Classrooms Through Universal Design for Learning

Rhonda Vieth Fuelberth and Lynda Ewell Laird

Developing Curricula and Assessment Tools for the Physically 182

Integrated Dance Class

Mark Tomasic

5

2013 VSA Intersections: Arts and Special Education Exemplary Programs and Approaches

IntroductionSHARON M. MALLEY, EDITOR

The John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts (Kennedy Center) is dedicated

to promoting opportunities for students in kindergarten–grade 12 arts education through its

varied VSA, Jean Kennedy Smith Arts and Disability Programs. When teachers and facilitators

fully include students with disabilities in well-designed arts education, chances for achievement

in many domains can increase (Malley & Silverstein, in press). Students with disabilities who

participate in the arts are given opportunities to convey sophisticated ideas, experience

validation in their work, and enhance their academic pursuits. Inherent in arts education are

means of diverse and variable expressions, responses, and outcomes, allowing students

opportunities to diverge from the rote learning often required in other subjects. Thus, students

with disabilities can exercise cognitive processes, find and develop their unique voices, and

experience overall success (MacLean, 2008).

This second edition of Exemplary Programs and Approaches originates from the Kennedy

Center’s 2013 VSA Intersections: Arts and Special Education Conference and Forum, a Jean

Kennedy Smith Arts and Disability Program. The conference included over 50 sessions covering

an array of topics within the intersecting fields of arts and special education. Following the

conference, national leaders met in a forum to identify and discuss needs and issues integral to

the education of children with disabilities in the arts.

Findings from the 2013 Forum indicated several areas of need, similar to those of the

2012 VSA Examining the Intersection of Arts Education and Special Education: A National Forum

(Silverstein, 2012). Participants’ recommendations can be expressed in five broad statements

(Malley, in press):

a. Professional learning should be designed to ensure that all teachers are teaching all

students (with an emphasis on inclusion of students with disabilities).

b. Communication should be reciprocal across all levels of the educational system, from

student, to teacher, to school, to district, to the wider society.

6

INTRODUCTION

c. Arts educators should be evaluated appropriate to their roles, which require different

skill sets and scope of work from those of other educators.

d. There should be a unified message on the benefits of arts education for students with

disabilities, which is communicated across all levels of stakeholders and policy makers.

e. There should be a robust body of easily accessible knowledge, through research, on the

benefits of arts education for students with disabilities.

With this second edition of VSA Intersections professional papers, the Kennedy Center

continues to respond to many of the recommendations from both the 2012 and 2013 Forums.

The publication itself addresses the need for increasing contributions to the knowledge base,

with several articles demonstrating positive research findings. Within the articles there are

descriptions of exemplary graduate and applied programs, innovative practices, and models

for partnerships. All of the authors are well-respected leading practitioners and/or educators in

an arts discipline with expertise devoted to educating students with disabilities. Their collective

voices within this publication provide readers with some of the most current exemplary

practices and expertise representing a range of arts education disciplines: drama, visual arts,

music, and dance.

A continuing theme emerging from both Forums is the need for an ongoing single

publication, such as a professional journal, for current practices and research in the arts and

special education. In their paper, “Next Steps: New Research and Teaching Journals at the

Intersection of the Arts and Special Education,” Gerber, Keifer-Boyd, and Crockett demonstrate

the need for two professional journals, one for practitioners and one for researchers, and offer

examples of similar journals and their online accessibility. Beverly Levett Gerber, renowned in

her work as both a visual art and special educator, is Professor Emeritus of Special Education

at Southern Connecticut University and the recipient of the National Art Education Association

2011 Lowenfeld Award. Karen Keifer-Boyd, Professor of Art Education and Women’s Studies,

School of Visual Arts, University of Pennsylvania, co-founded the journal Visual Culture and

Gender. In this article she shares her knowledge as co-editor of that publication. Jean Crockett

is Professor and Director of the School of Special Education, School Psychology, and Early

7

INTRODUCTION

Childhood Studies at the University of Florida. Her research addresses leadership and policy

in the administration of special education, and she is currently conducting an analysis of

published articles on arts and special education.

In “Exemplary Theater Practices: Creating Barrier-Free Theatre,” Sally Bailey draws

upon 25 years of experience to share her approaches and strategies including students with

disabilities in drama education and theatre production. Sally is Associate Professor of Theatre

at Kansas State University and the author of the book “Barrier-Free Theatre,” a comprehensive

manual for including students with disabilities in all aspects of theatre arts.

Tim McCarty’s paper “Visual Theatre: Building a Bridge for Student Success” narrows

the scope of drama education to address the needs of students who are Deaf and hard-of-

hearing attending the Maryland School for the Deaf. In his paper he describes the Quest

TheatreBridge program, including elements of lessons designed to address communication

and literacy skills. Tim is the Founder and Artistic Director of Quest Visual Theatre, Lanham,

Maryland, and has worked for over 20 years developing theatre programs for Deaf and hard-

of-hearing students. Quest has achieved international recognition, and most recently Tim has

shared his expertise with the Deaf community in China.

Continuing with the topic of drama in education, Linda Krakaur provides readers with a

framework for teaching literacy to students with learning disabilities through drama techniques

and Universal Design for Learning. Her paper, “Mastering the Curriculum: Students Framed as

Experts,” encapsulates key aspects of her Master’s degree thesis. She is currently pursuing her

Doctorate in Teacher Education and Professional Development in the College of Education at

the University of Maryland.

Sophie Lucido Johnson, an artist and special education teacher in New Orleans,

developed an arts integrated social emotional curriculum for students with emotional

behavioral disorders. In her paper “Emotional Intelligence through Art: Strategies for Children

with Emotional Behavioral Disorders” she shares strategies and outcomes of the program,

which targets students who developed post-traumatic stress disorder as a result of hurricane

Katrina. The program is currently offered in four New Orleans charter schools.

8

INTRODUCTION

In “Fostering Resilience in an Intergenerational Art and Literacy Program for Homeless

Families: An Analysis of Curriculum,” Donalyn Heise and Laurie MacGillivray developed and

analyzed a literacy program they implemented with homeless children and their mothers who

are in a drug/alcohol addiction program. The curriculum incorporates a variety of visual art

lessons and literacy skills building, with the goal of supporting resilience. The authors share

their strategies and research findings. Donalyn is Associate Professor of Art Education at the

University of Memphis, and coordinates the art education program in the Department of Art

within the College of Communication and Fine Arts. Laurie is a Professor in the Department of

Instruction, Curriculum, and Leadership at the University of Memphis, with a research focus on

literacy practices in urban areas.

Lynne Horoschak and two of her students, Kim Gavin and Veronica Hicks, describe

a unique college curriculum in “Reflections on Moore College of Art and Design’s Master’s

Degree Program in Art Education with an Emphasis in Special Populations.” Lynne developed

the program drawing on her over 30 years experience as an art educator. She is now

Distinguished Professor and Program Manager of the Moore College program. The paper

includes summaries of each of Kim and Veronica’s thesis research. Kim, currently an art teacher

in Philadelphia Public Schools and adjunct professor at Moore College, describes her study

of art classroom assessment strategies for special education and English language learners

in the acquisition of language and literacy skills. Veronica, who is pursuing her doctorate at

Pennsylvania State University, summarizes her action research with female foster students with

disabilities, examining the impact of an after-school art club on self-efficacy.

In “IDEA Empowerment Through Difference Find Card Strategies:

Communitarian Approaches to Empowerment,” Karen Keifer-Boyd and L. Michelle Kraft

provide a strategy for including all students in visual art curriculum assessment through the use

of “Find Cards.” They describe a communitarian approach to teaching and learning in the art

classroom, and how “Find Cards,” developed by Keifer-Boyd in the 1970’s, provides a tool for

inclusion in a variety of disciplines and settings. Michelle is Professor of Art in the Department

of Communication and Fine Arts and Assistant Dean of the J. E. & Eileen Hancock College of

Liberal Arts and Education, Lubbock Christian University in Lubbock, Texas.

9

INTRODUCTION

Addressing the needs of music educators to effectively include students with

disabilities, Rhonda Vieth Fuelberth and Lynda Ewell Laird provide an explanation of Universal

Design for Learning and guidelines and strategies for inclusion in the music classroom. Their

paper, “Tools and Stories: Preparing Music Educators for Successful Inclusive Classrooms

through Universal Design for Learning,” originates from the work of their graduate students,

who contributed to a strategy bank based on experiences as in-service teachers. Rhonda is

Associate Professor of Music Education and the Graduate Music Education Coordinator in the

Glenn Korff School of Music, University of Nebraska-Lincoln. Lynda is a doctoral student and

graduate teaching assistant at the University of Nebraska-Lincoln where she is the recipient of

the prestigious Hixson-Lied Fellowship.

To conclude this edition of exemplary papers Mark Tomasic draws upon over 20 years of

experience working with the Dancing Wheels Company and School, in “Developing Curricula

and Assessment Tools for the Physically Integrated Dance Class.” He is currently Artistic

Advisor for the company and school and serves on the Dance Department faculty of Santa

Monica College in California. His paper provides dance educators with practical strategies for

including dancers with physical disabilities in modern dance training and performance, based

on his book, “Physically Integrated Dance: The Dancing Wheels Comprehensive Guide for

Teachers, Choreographers, and Students of Mixed Abilities.”

References

Maclean, J. (2008). The art of inclusion. Canadian Review of Art Education, 35, 75-91.

Malley, S. M. (in press). Proceedings report, 2013 VSA Intersections: Arts and Special Education

Forum. Washington, DC: The John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts.

Malley, S. M., & Silverstein, L. B. (in press). 2012 VSA Examining the intersection of arts

education and special education. Arts Education Policy Review.

Silverstein, L. B. (2012). Proceedings report Examining the Intersection of Arts Education

and Special Education: A National Forum. Washington, DC: The John F. Kennedy

Center for the Performing Arts.

10

Next Steps: New Research and Teaching Journals at the Intersection of the Arts and Special Education

BEVERLY LEVETT GERBER, KAREN T. KEIFER-BOYD, AND JEAN B. CROCKETT

The John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts’ Office of VSA and Accessibility

has twice brought together leaders in the fields of special education, arts education (visual and

performing) and arts research, with representatives from the U.S. Department of Education.

The 2012 VSA Examining the Intersection of Arts Education and Special Education: A National

Forum produced two tangible results: (a) a new on-line arts/special education bibliography (The

John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts, n. d.); and (b) a book of professional papers

that focused, for the first time, on issues relevant to their intersection (Malley, Ed., 2012). The

bibliography will have periodic updates by Kennedy Center staff.

One year later, the 2013 VSA Intersections: Arts and Special Education Conference and

Forum again brought together people with an emerging professional focus to share their ideas,

concerns, and goals regarding the intersection of arts and special education. One expressed

concern was the need “to tell our professional story” – the collective voices of arts educators

who reach and teach students with disabilities and the researchers who contribute to and

validate their knowledge base. It is also the story of special educators who value and use the

arts to teach their students.

The arts/special education professional story is multi-faceted, continually unfolding and

needs to be told. Arts/special education stories tell about students with special learning and/or

behavioral needs who experience school as a difficult place. Yet, many of these students make

it through school due to their arts experiences (Gerber, 2011). The arts offer a global way of

interpreting and expressing information. Difficulties in traditional classroom subjects need not

transfer to the artroom. Arts/special education stories are told by classroom arts teachers who

observe students with disabilities blossom in studio art classes as they gain recognition and

approval from their peers, often for the first time (Lokerson & Joynes, 2006).

Countless actors who win acclaim on stage and screen, despite diagnosed learning

difficulties, demonstrate the value of performing arts education. Students with disabilities can

11

INTERSECTION OF THE ARTS AND SPECIAL EDUCATION JOURNAL

excel in and through the arts. Over the past decade, a small but growing body of research is

beginning to document and demonstrate the importance of the arts in the lives of students

with disabilities.

Currently, there is no home or central professional location for arts/special education

research and inspirational and innovative stories of teaching and learning. Information on

intersections of art and special education is dispersed among many journals and is difficult to

access. “An Attack on the Tower of Babel: Creating a National Arts/Special Education Resource

Center” (Gerber & Horoschak, 2012) addressed the problems encountered by such a search.

Arts/special education information is available in textbooks (Anderson, 1992; Gerber & Guay,

2006; Gerber & Kellman, 2010; Kellman, 2001; Kraft & Keifer-Boyd, 2013; Nyman & Jenkins,

1999; Wexler, 2009), journal articles (Blandy, 1994; Blandy, Pancsoar, & Mockensturm, 1988;

Derby, 2011; Guay, 2003; Kellman, 2004; Kraft 2006), research (Burton, Horowitz, & Abeles,

1999; Catterall, 2009; Malley, Dattilo, & Gast, 2002), and doctoral dissertations.

However, there are no journals specifically for research and teaching the arts to students

with disabilities. Information spans a multitude of professional journals (see Appendix A),

many different (and unrelated) professional organizations, and sometimes obscure community

publications. New journals that focus on the emerging intersection of the arts and special

education professional fields are needed. Student assignment to an “arts rich classroom”

(Burton, Horowitz, & Abeles, 1999) with a knowledgeable arts/special education teacher

should not be the “luck of the draw.” All teachers should have access to arts/special education

information.

Based on experiences and practices of the National Art Education Association (NAEA)

and the Council for Exceptional Children (CEC), our largest and oldest art education and

special education professional organizations, two journals are necessary. One journal would

focus on arts/special education research. The second journal would address innovative arts/

special education teaching approaches and programs developing around the country. Without

easy access, many arts/special education exemplars are missed. Arts/special education

professional journals not only can make information easy to find, no small matter as noted

below, but can also encourage new special education/arts teaching practices and research.

12

INTERSECTION OF THE ARTS AND SPECIAL EDUCATION JOURNAL

Journal Exemplars from the National Art Education Association

and the Council for Exceptional Children

Intersections: Arts/Special Education journals would be new, but can be established

quickly. Special education and the visual and performing arts professions have developed a

wealth of information about teaching practices and research and for many years have published

both research and teaching professional journals. These peer reviewed journals are ongoing

resources for the dissemination of innovative practices and promising discoveries. Through

printed materials and the Internet, the journals have become accessible knowledge bases for

both current research and best practices in each field.

The authors represent the Council for Exceptional Children (CEC) and the National Art

Education Association (NAEA) and have served as liaison between the organizations and on

their journals’ editorial boards. They draw on their extensive experience to describe journals

from each organization. They also share practical information related to current NAEA and CEC

publications.

Council for Exceptional Children Journals.

The Council for Exceptional Children is the largest education association for

professionals engaged in special education and gifted education. “CEC’s mission is to improve,

through excellence and advocacy, the education and quality of life for children and youth with

exceptionalities and to enhance engagement of their families“ (CEC, 2011). CEC offers its

30,000 international members two peer-reviewed journals, Exceptional Children and Teaching

Exceptional Children. These journals address the wide-ranging interests of researchers,

teachers, administrators, and therapists. Each journal serves a different purpose and appeals to

different audiences within the professional community.

The research journal (Exceptional Children), published quarterly, is the premier scholarly

journal in the field of special education. Over the past 75 years, Exceptional Children has

established a strong reputation for publishing high quality scholarship. The journal’s editors

and editorial board members are selected from among a cadre of highly regarded special

education researchers. Only five to ten percent of submitted manuscripts are accepted for

13

INTERSECTION OF THE ARTS AND SPECIAL EDUCATION JOURNAL

publication annually. Similar to other prominent educational research journals, Exceptional

Children most frequently publishes descriptive and intervention studies, position papers and

editorials on controversial issues, research and methodological reviews, and policy analyses

related to exceptional learners (Mastropieri et al., 2009).

The research-to-practice journal Teaching Exceptional Children is published six times a

year and features information teachers can readily use in their classrooms, including timely

articles about specialized instructional technologies, strategies, and procedures. Both

journals are available to CEC members in print versions and electronically through CEC’s

online journal gateway where members can search articles published in the past decade

and download content in PDF format to computers or eBook readers. Both journals are also

available to non-members through most academic libraries.

Prompted by priorities in federal legislation, the US Department of Education frequently

supports research addressed in special education journals. For example, in the past decade

the accountability provisions of the No Child Left Behind Act (U.S. Department of Education,

2002), changes in the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (2004) related to Response

to Intervention (RTI), and developments in the effectiveness of early reading practices have

influenced instructional practices for students with disabilities (Mastropieri et al., 2009). As

a consequence, most articles in CEC’s journals address academic and social interventions,

which is not surprising since special education instruction targets the development of critical

academic, functional, and social skills of children and youth with disabilities.

Numerous other journals not published through CEC address a similar audience of

researchers, teacher educators, teachers, therapists, administrators, and parents engaged in

educating children and youth with exceptional learning needs (see Appendix A). Some of these

journals address broad topics. Others focus more narrowly on professional issues relevant to

specific groups of learners, such as students with autism, emotional and behavioral disorders,

intellectual disabilities, or those who are blind or deaf. It is important to note, however,

that topics related to the intersection of special education and arts education are relatively

underrepresented in special education journals, as well as in arts education journals.

14

INTERSECTION OF THE ARTS AND SPECIAL EDUCATION JOURNAL

The infrequent publication of arts related articles in special education literature along

with the dearth of special education articles within arts education literature posed a particular

concern for Crockett (2013) in conducting an analysis of published journal articles addressing

the intersection of special education and arts education published from 2002 to 2012.

Search terms that would determine the types of articles published, topics of interest, and

populations of students with exceptional learning needs proved to be a challenge to find in

these publications. For example, searching the Academic Search Premier and ERIC First Search

electronic databases with the combined terms arts education, music, visual and media art,

drama, dance and disabilities and schools, identified only one article published since 2002 in

Exceptional Children and none in the highly regarded Journal of Special Education. Similarly,

only one article related to special education was identified in the Arts Education Policy Review.

CEC’s practitioner journal, Teaching Exceptional Children, published several relevant articles for

classroom teachers focused on the integration of the arts in special and gifted education.

This initial scan of the literature located only 105 articles. Of these, 64 were professional

commentaries or program descriptions, and 41 were original research studies. From this initial

analysis of the publications addressing the intersection of arts education and special education,

fewer than half (39 %)of what is known is research-based. Much more research and research-

to-practice information is needed to support the preparation of teachers in both fields to meet

the needs of exceptional learners included in today’s schools; and, to demonstrate to funders,

stakeholders, and policy-makers the efficacy of arts education for students with disabilities.

Founding a Journal: National Art Education Association Journals

The National Art Education Association (NAEA) journals and NAEA issue groups’

journals, as well as many other journals within and outside the field of art education, have

transitioned to online journal publications, particularly since 2010.1 For example, the

International Journal of Education Through Art (IJETA) began as a print publication for its first

1 NAEA and NAEA affiliated online journals include: CultureWork: A Periodic Broadside for Arts and Culture Workers (http://culturework.uoregon.edu/), International Journal of Education & the Arts (http://www.ijea.org/), International Journal of Education Through Art (http://www.intellectbooks.co.uk/journals/view-Journal,id=121/), Journal of Cultural Research in Art Education (http://ussea.webhost.uits.arizona.edu/JCRAE.html), Journal of Social Theory in Art Education (http://cstae.org/journal/), Studies in Art Education (http://www.arteducators.org/research/writing-for-naea), Visual Arts Research (http://www.press.uillinois.edu/journals/var.html), and Visual Culture & Gender (http://vcg.emitto.net).

15

INTERSECTION OF THE ARTS AND SPECIAL EDUCATION JOURNAL

seven volumes. However, IJETA editors recognized limitations of print journals, such as the cost

to print the journal, especially if the journal included color images, and the time and costs with

postal mailings, and expected that an electronic journal would increase readership. In 2012,

InSEA (International Society for Education Through Art), an affiliate of NAEA, in partnership

with Intellect published IJETA as an online journal. Other art education journals such as Visual

Arts Research and Studies in Art Education offer subscription options for both print and

electronic versions of the journal.

There are several elements to consider in founding two professional journals proposed

in this paper: “Intersections: Arts and Special Education Research” (IASER) and “Intersections:

Arts and Special Education Teaching/Innovative Programs” (IASETIP). The journal title is an

important consideration as it is the identity and often will be referred to by the first part of the

title before the colon and by its acronym. A mission statement for the journal is the basis of the

call for papers to prospective authors and guides the peer-review decisions of papers to be

included in each issue of the journal. The ISSN number is the standardized international code

that is needed for the journal to be listed in search databases, whether a print or electronic

serial. While database services can be contacted to request listing, the databases also contact

journal editors to include established journals.

An advisory board, often comprised of elected officers of an organization, may elect or

appoint the review board and editors. Typically review boards have a specified number of years

of service and a staggered approach to adding new members so that a review board is not

completely refreshed with new members all at one time. Tracking of the number of submissions

and acceptance rates is important for credibility and should be provided in a letter that authors

might use for their promotion and tenure dossiers. With online publications, the site can be

designed with forums for readers to discuss the articles. Online journals can be designed

with multi-modal and language translators for greater accessibility, and must be designed in

compliance with ADA regulations.

The Studies description provides a good example of a succinct mission statement

included in the publicity of the journal.

16

INTERSECTION OF THE ARTS AND SPECIAL EDUCATION JOURNAL

Studies in Art Education, is a quarterly journal that reports quantitative, qualitative, his-

torical, and philosophical research in art education, including explorations of theory and

practice in the areas of art production, art criticism, aesthetics, art history, human de-

velopment, curriculum and instruction, and assessment. Studies also publishes reports

of applicable research in related fields such as anthropology, education, psychology,

philosophy, and sociology. (NAEA, 2014, para. 1)

Digital interfaces for searching a journal can provide information on the most cited and most

assessed articles (Figure 1), which would be helpful to identify emerging perspectives in the

intersections of art and special education.

The following description about JSTOR provides an overview of its goals in helping to

establish the presence of a journal and to make it more accessible.

JSTOR is a shared digital library created in 1995 to help university and college libraries

to free space on their shelves, save costs, and provide greater levels of access to more

content than ever before. More generally, by digitizing content to high standards and

supporting its long-term preservation, we also aim to help libraries and publishers of

scholarly content transition their collections and publishing activities from print to digital

operations. Our aim is to expand access to scholarly content around the world and

to preserve it for future generations. We provide access to some or all of the content

free-of-charge when we believe we can do so and still meet our long-term obligations.

(JSTOR, 2013, para. 2)

Other considerations are free access versus subscription-based, funding support,

designers and editing staff. NAEA publications have volunteer editorial, advisory, and review

boards, and a small number of staff members do final editing and design of the journal, as well

as publicity and dissemination of the journal. Additionally, storage and copyright issues need to

be considered in founding and maintaining a journal.

In 2005, Karen Keifer-Boyd and Deborah Smith-Shank co-founded an international

journal, Visual Culture & Gender, as an annual publication, and both serve as editors. There

are eight volumes published from 2006 to the present (Figure 2). It is the first multimedia

17

INTERSECTION OF THE ARTS AND SPECIAL EDUCATION JOURNAL

online journal in the field of art education and has an established international review board

of feminist art education scholars. The journal is included in the following databases: Proquest

ARTbibliographies Modern; Feminist Periodicals; Wilson Database; and EBSCO.

Several NAEA and NAEA affiliated journals, such as the International Journal of

Education Through Art and the Journal of Social Theory in Art Education, use an online

manuscript submission process, which also accepts uploads of multimedia as part of the journal

article, for online review and publication. Open Journal System (OJS) enables web-based

peer review and submission that reduces time and cost in postal mail, or items lost in email or

computer desktop disorganization. The process by which authors submit work and check the

status of their manuscript is helpful to reduce the workload of email responses. Moreover, all

interactions are recorded on the submission site for the journal, which provides much needed

records of when manuscripts are submitted and reviewed. Also, reminders can be set up for

automatic notification of due dates for both reviewers and authors.

We hope that this paper provides useful information to guide the founding of two

Intersection journals. Questions to consider are whether online publications increase or limit

who can access digital scholarship. Issues of bandwidth and access to current technologies,

software and hardware to submit work for consideration, as well as support and information

for file formatting and using the submission programs need to be included in the plans for

founding new journals. Criteria for establishing the high quality of the journals include peer-

review, rejection rates, tracking circulation and frequency of access, ADA and copyright

compliance, upload and download speed, and searchable archives of past volumes of

the journal.

If You Create It, They Will Come

When a Special Needs Issues Group (SNAE) was approved and established at the

National Art Education Association in 2000, a member shared, “Now I have a home. Before

our group began, there was no place for me at conventions.” Joseph Parsons, a Florida art

teacher of adolescent students with severe behavior and learning problems, had been unable

to find NAEA convention sessions and information that specifically addressed his art/special

education teaching.

18

INTERSECTION OF THE ARTS AND SPECIAL EDUCATION JOURNAL

Since the SNAE group became part of NAEA, Parsons has not only attended SNAE’s

many and diverse convention presentations, from teaching practices to action research, but

he has presented sessions about his own teaching. He proudly shows slides of his students’

artwork as he describes his teaching methods. Parson’s teaching suggestions range from

classroom management to innovative art lessons, many using simple, locally available

materials. Parsons also takes an active role in the Special Needs Issues Group (SNAE). He is

the “keeper of Robert’s Rules” and is now SNAE’s secretary. Members benefit from Parson’s

professional “home” in SNAE at the National Art Education Association. For the past twelve

years, SNAE’s home at NAEA conventions has provided teaching and research presentations,

business meetings devoted to art educators’ special education concerns, and a growing

network of supportive professionals.

Another arts and special education “home” has been established at the Council for

Exceptional Children (CEC). CEC’s new topic area, “Arts in Special Education,” was created

in 2011 and now receives and reviews convention arts proposals. Arts in Special Education

topic area proposal readers have backgrounds in special education and arts education. Arts in

Special Education presenters and those who attend their sessions also attend other arts/SED

presentations. Like Parsons, they have found their professional home.

Prior to the creation of the “Arts in Special Education” topic area, arts presentations

had to be submitted to other topic areas or to CEC divisions. Each has its own professional

readers, current education directions, legislative concerns, and a limited number of convention

time slots. Arts proposals too often were not seen as relevant to the division topic area, were

not accepted, or were put on a wait-list. Those few arts proposals that did manage to squeak

through this process were difficult to locate in the convention program because they were

listed under non-art divisions or topic areas. Since 2011, arts presentations are easily found

under “Arts in Special Education.” CEC’s Special Interest Group (SIG) for Teachers of the Arts

provides still another opportunity to meet, network, and learn more about common interests.

19

INTERSECTION OF THE ARTS AND SPECIAL EDUCATION JOURNAL

Recommendations

New journals are needed to tell our arts/special education research and teaching

professional stories. Two editorial boards (one research, one teaching) should include

representatives from art education, music, dance, and theatre education, related arts therapies,

special education, and administration. Each journal should be published twice a year and

include submissions from all of the arts. The “Intersections: Arts and Special Education

Research” and “Intersections: Arts and Special Education Teaching/Innovative Programs”

professional journals will encourage much needed peer-reviewed, published work and can

provide a dedicated home for arts/special education research and exemplary teaching and

programs. The two journals will enhance and enrich the emerging professional community

brought together through the 2012 and 2013 VSA Intersections: Arts and Special Education

Forums. These professional journals are a necessary next step to ensure that students with

disabilities are included in arts programs and that their teachers have access to arts research

and teacher education information.

References

Anderson, F. E. (1992). Art for all the children (2nd ed.). Springfield, IL: Charles Thomas.

Blandy, D. (1994). Assuming responsibility: Disability rights and the preparation of art

educators. Studies in art Education, 35(3), 179-187.

Blandy, D.; Pancsoar, E., & Mockensturm, T. (1988). Guidelines for teaching art to children and

youth experiencing significant mental/physical challenges. Art Education, 46(3), 197-

210.

Burton, J., Horowitz, R., & Abeles, H. (1999). Learning in and through the arts: Curriculum

Implications. New York, NY: Teachers College, Columbia University: Center for Arts

Education Research.

Catterall, J. S. (2009). Doing well and doing good by doing art: A 12-year longitudinal study of

arts education: Effects on the achievement and values of young adults. Los Angeles:

1-Group Books.

20

INTERSECTION OF THE ARTS AND SPECIAL EDUCATION JOURNAL

Council for Exceptional Children. (2011). Mission statement. Author. Retrieved from http://www.

cec.sped.org/About-Us/Mission-and-Vision?sc_lang=en

Crockett, J. B. (2013). What do we know and how do we know it: What’s being published at

the intersection of special education and arts education? Presented at the 2013 VSA

Intersections: Arts and Special Education Conference and Forum. Washington, DC:

The John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts.

Derby, J. (2011). Disability studies and art education. Studies in Art Education, 52(2), 94-111.

Gerber, B. L., & Horoschak, L. (2012). An attack on the Tower of Babel: Creating a national

arts/special education resource center. In The intersection of arts education and special

education: exemplary programs and approaches (pp. 113-128). Washington, DC: The

John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts.

Gerber, B. L. (2011). 2011 Lowenfeld Award Lecture. Art education and special education: A

promising partnership. Retrieved from www.arteducators.org

Gerber, B. L., & Guay, D. M. (Eds.). (2006). Reaching and teaching students with special needs

through art. Reston, VA: National Art Education Association.

Gerber, B. L., & Kellman, J. (Eds.). (2010). Understanding students with autism through art.

Reston, VA: National Art Education Association.

Guay, D. M. (2003). Paraeducators in art classrooms, issues of culture, leadership, and special

needs. Studies in Art Education, 45(1), 20-39.

Individuals with Disabilities Education Improvement Act of 2004, 20 U.S.C. §§ 1401 et seq.

(2004).

JSTOR (2013). New to JSTOR? Learn more about us. Retrieved from http://about.jstor.

org/10things

Kellman, J. (2004). Art of a child with autism. Journal of Aesthetic Education, 31(1), 12-21.

Kellman, J. (2001). Autism, art, and children: The stories we draw. Westport, CT: Bergin &

Garvey.

Kraft, M. (2006). Art education and disability: Re-envisioning educational efficiency. The Journal

for Social Theory in Art Education, 26, 302-320.

21

INTERSECTION OF THE ARTS AND SPECIAL EDUCATION JOURNAL

Kraft, M., & Keifer-Boyd, K. (2013). Including difference: A communitarian approach to art

education in the least restrictive environment. Reston, VA: National Art Education

Association.

Lokerson, J. E., & Joynes, A. C. (2006). Reaching and teaching students with learning

disabilities.In Gerber, B. L., & Guay, D. M. (Eds.), Reaching and teaching students with

special needs through art (pp. 83-106). Reston, VA: National Art Education Association.

Malley, S. M. (Ed.) (2012). The intersection of arts education and special education: exemplary

programs and approaches. Washington, DC: The John F. Kennedy Center for the

Performing Arts.

Malley, S. M., Dattilo, J., & Gast, D. (2002). Effects of visual arts instruction on the mental health

of adults with mental retardation and mental illness. Mental Retardation, 40, 278-296.

Mastropieri, M. A., Berkeley, S., McDuffie, K. A., Graff, H., Marshak, L., Conner, N. A., Diamond,

C. M., Simpkins, P., Bowdey, F. R., Fulchep, A., Scruggs, T. E., & Cuenca-Sanchez.

(2009). What is published in the field of special education? An analysis of 11 prominent

journals. Exceptional Children, 76, 95-109.

NAEA (2014). Research & Knowledge: Studies in Art Education. Retrieved from

http://www.arteducators.org/research/studies

Nyman, A. L., & Jenkins, A. M. (Eds.). (1999). Issues and approaches to art for students with

special needs. Reston, VA: National Art Education Association.

The John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts (n. d.). Bibliography of arts

education and disabilities. Retrieved from The John F. Kennedy Center for the

Performing Arts website: http://www.kennedy-center.org/education/vsa/resources/

ArtEdandSpecialEdbibliography2012.pdf

U.S. Department of Education (2002). No Child Left Behind Improvement Act. Public Law 107-

110. Retrieved from http://www2.ed.gov/policy/elsec/leg/esea02/107-110.pdf

Wexler, A. (2009). Art and disability: The social and political struggles facing education. New

York, NY: Palgrave.

22

INTERSECTION OF THE ARTS AND SPECIAL EDUCATION JOURNAL

Figure 1: JSTOR

Figure 1: JSTOR, a digital library.

23

INTERSECTION OF THE ARTS AND SPECIAL EDUCATION JOURNAL

Figure 2. Visual Culture & Gender

Figure 2. An example of an online journal cover of Visual Culture & Gender

journal, with links to the mission statement, prior volumes, ISSN number, Review

Board, Call for Papers, Letter for Authors to Use for Promotion & Tenure,

Reader’s Comments, and NAEA Women’s Caucus

24

INTERSECTION OF THE ARTS AND SPECIAL EDUCATION JOURNAL

Appendix A: A List of Special Education Journals2 Key Special Education Journals http://classguides.lib.uconn.edu/content.php?pid=65298&sid=1310559

•Advances in Learning and Behavioral Disabilities (Yearbook) •Advances in Special Education •American Annals of the Deaf•American Journal on Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities•The Australasian Journal of Special Education•British Journal of Special Education•The British Journal of Visual Impairment•Deafness & Education International•Disability & Society•Education and Training in Developmental Disabilities•European Journal of Special Needs Education•Exceptional Children •Exceptionality•Federal Outlook for Exceptional Children: Budget Considerations and CEC Recommendations •Focus on Autism and other Developmental Disabilities •Focus on Exceptional Children• Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities • International Journal of Disability, Development, and Education• Intervention in School and Clinic •Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders•Journal of Behavioral Education•Journal of Deaf Studies and Deaf Education•Journal of Early Intervention •Journal of Early and Intensive Behavior Intervention •Journal of Learning Disabilities •Journal of Research in Special Educational Needs•Journal of Special Education •Journal of Special Education Technology•The Journal of the International Association of Special Education•Language, Speech & Hearing Services in Schools•Learning Disability Quarterly: Journal of the Division for Children with Learning

Disabilities •RE:View Rehabilitation and Education for Blindness•Remedial and Special Education •State Special Education Outcomes •Teacher Education and Special Education •Teaching Exceptional Children •Topics in Early Childhood Special Education •Volta Review

2 Although extensive, please note that this is not a comprehensive list of special education journals.

25

Exemplary Theatre Practices: Creating Barrier-Free Theatre

SALLY BAILEY

Inclusion of students with disabilities in drama classrooms, drama clubs, after-school

activities, and community theatre with typically developing students is often best accomplished

at the peer level. In a true inclusion setting, students with disabilities are accepted as equals

rather than as second-class mascots who have been allowed to tag along. This kind of equal

and respectful inclusion is necessary if students with disabilities are to develop self-worth and

feel they belong to the whole school and community.

Full inclusion can happen successfully in drama classes and theatre productions.

Dramatic activities focus on the expression of emotions and ideas, along with communication

with others through body, voice, and imagination. Everyone has the opportunity to experience

a full range of emotions and can learn to express those emotions appropriately through theatre

games, improvisations, and acting out characters. While some individuals may have bodily

or vocal challenges, everyone can access his or her imagination and learn to channel it into

dramatic form. While other art forms can be practiced individually and in isolation, the social

element inherent in theatre makes it an excellent venue for developing interactive skills and

connections with others.

This paper outlines some of the basics of creating inclusive, barrier-free theatre for

people of all abilities. The first section addresses the arts as a birthright, that is, the need that

everyone has for participation in the arts, emphasizing inclusion. People with and without

disabilities grow from working together, forming social bonds, serving as role models for each

other, and co-creating artistic work.

The second section addresses the removal of attitudinal barriers that teachers and

directors with no previous experience working with people with disabilities may need.

Attitudinal adjustments will enable all participants to feel welcome and included in the group.

As leaders, teachers may also need to model positive attitudes for students who have not had

experience interacting with peers with disabilities.

26

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

The third section addresses foundational strategies and accommodations that open

participation in dramatic activities and theatre performance to everyone. Foundational

strategies and accommodations include setting clear ground rules and boundaries, remaining

flexible, making adjustments in communication style, and utilizing 21st century technology. In

addition, suggestions are provided for developing individualized accommodations.

The last section provides a basic introduction to creating original plays specifically for

inclusive groups. When students are co-creators of a play (with appropriate guidance from

drama teachers and directors), they focus on ideas that are exciting to them, invent dialogue

they can articulate, and include interactions that are important to them.

The Arts as a Birthright

A Natural Part of Human Development

The arts — drama, poetry, dance, visual arts, and music — are the birthright of every

human being. Every child possesses natural abilities to sing, dance, draw, and act at various

points early in development (Bailey, 2010). As soon as they are able to focus their eyes, within

hours of birth, most typically developing infants start to imitate the actions of the people

around them (Cozolino, 2006). Between the ages of two and two-and-a-half dramatic play

begins. Children imitate the behaviors they have observed and improvise them, practicing

interaction skills, asking “What if…?” and creating original stories through drama (Weininger,

1979, 1988). Russian psychologist Lev Vygotsky believed that dramatic play was how children

developed the emotional-regulation skills that make socialization and learning possible

(Bodovra & Leong, 2006). He also believed the dialogue of dramatic play and the self-talk

children acquire from it are necessary precursors, along with the practice of internal thought

and other cognitive structures, for the development of abstract thinking (Vygotsky, 1994). If this

is true, then drama is needed for young children to become thinking, reasoning, social human

beings. If natural inclinations toward the arts are nurtured and scaffolded by adults in a child’s

life, one or more of them may become a preferred channel for communication, exploration,

and self-expression. Hence, we are all artists (Bailey, 1993; 2010). In 2011 the National

Endowment for the Arts demonstrated support for this need for the arts in each person’s life by

framing a national research agenda focused on the arts and human development (NEA, 2011).

27

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

Children with significant developmental disabilities, such as autism or intellectual

disabilities, experience delayed developmental milestones and sometimes are isolated from

potential playmates. They may miss dramatic play opportunities, which reinforce their need

for drama and other arts experiences through school, recreation, and therapy sessions. In many

cases arts experiences may be crucial for socio-emotional and cognitive growth (Brooke, 2006,

2009; Chasen, 2011; Gallo-Lopez & Rubin, 2012).

Role Theory

Role Theory, first articulated by Jacob Moreno, is the ability to take on a role, even a

role that a person has not played before, and explore it through action (Sternberg & Garcia,

2000). Moreno believed that all people are natural role players, role takers, and role creators.

We start life with a few roles, and as we grow, we develop new ones through dramatic play and

actual experiences. Once we know how to play a role, it becomes part of our role repertoire.

The larger a role repertoire, the more flexible a person can be in terms of behavior. If roles are

played in appropriate ways, then a person will develop healthy behaviors and relationships.

Drama experiences assist actors as they are developing new roles for real life and expanding

their role repertoires.

Barriers to the Arts

Pablo Picasso famously said, “All children are artists. The problem is how to remain an

artist once he grows up” (Picasso, 2013). Unfortunately, we do not all have arts opportunities

throughout our lives. Many children lose their connection to the arts because the majority

of U.S. school systems do not incorporate them into their curricula (Parsad, Spiegelman, &

Coopersmith, J., 2011; SNAAP, 2013, 2013). Reports on the dearth of arts education in public

schools and after-school programs from the 1980’s through 2013 continue to caution that U.S.

public school students are in danger of losing all arts instruction due to local, state, and federal

education cuts (Descollonges, & Eisner, 2003; Fowler, 1996; Larson, 1997; NEA, 1988; Parsad,

et al., 2011; SNAAP, 2012, 2013).

Another barrier to the arts is a belief held by some that only talented individuals, who

are considered a select few even among the typically developing majority, have the ability to

28

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

participate in the arts as artists. The untalented masses may be able to watch and appreciate

the arts, but not make it themselves (Eisner, 2002; Fowler, 1996; Larson, 1997). However,

many leaders in arts education and research do not support this belief because they have

experienced all their students with and without disabilities responding positively to the arts

when given the opportunity (Bailey, 1993, 2010; Catterall, Dumais, & Hampden-Thompson,

2012; Chasen, 2011; Eisner, 2002; Gallo-Lopez & Rubin, 2012; Lister, Tanguay, Snow, &

D’Amico, 2009; Sarason, 1990; Snow, D’Amico, & Tanguay, 2003).

Benefits of Inclusion in the Arts

Hamlet said that the purpose of theatre “is to hold, as ‘twere, the mirror up to nature”

(Shakespeare, 1942, p. 1068). If he was correct, then theatre should reflect in the rehearsal

room and on the stage the same diversity that exists in life.

The inclusion experience benefits all participants. Young artists with disabilities benefit

from typically developing peers for continued artistic and socio-emotional growth (Bailey,

1993, 2010; Gallo-Lopez & Rubin, 2012). By the same token, typically developing artists learn

they have more in common with peers with disabilities than they may have previously realized

(Whitehurst & Howells, 2006). Theatre experiences often quickly establish a creative, safe, and

supportive environment that embraces everyone (Bailey 1993, 2010; Gallo-Lopez & Rubin,

2012). All of us have dreams, worries, fears, and hopes. Genuine friendships are sometimes

formed that continue outside rehearsal. In addition, typically developing actors are able to see

actors with disabilities as creative artists with strengths and unique personalities. This happens

organically through the regular action and interaction of a class or rehearsal process.

An adolescent who had the opportunity to work as a member of Pegasus, an inclusive

company at Imagination Stage in Bethesda, MD, expressed enjoyment of his experiences at

the time, “I really like these guys [the cast members who had disabilities], and I don’t get to

do anything this creative in any other part of my life.” Seventeen years later when asked what

being part of Pegasus meant to him in retrospect, he replied:

Pegasus taught me sooooo much. It taught me patience, it humbled me. I

learned to look at the world through a new lens, to question stereotypes.

29

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

The improvisational aspect of the shows taught me to think on my

feet and be flexible. Everyone has a contribution, something to share and is

of value. It’s hard to say how the skills I learned manifest in my current

job/life beyond that I use them in my day to day dealing with clients and

colleagues alike. One other big lesson I learned was to enjoy life, and laugh.

Despite the occasional meltdown, I was always impressed with the overall

joy in the room and sheer “fun” folks were having. (D. Fogel, personal

communication, May, 2, 2011)

Removing Attitudinal Barriers about Disability

The creation of accessible theatre experiences for students with disabilities – as in

the creation of accessibility anywhere else — begins with a consideration of attitudes: those

historically reflected in American society and those formed by individuals from personal

experiences. Attitudes with respect to individuals with disabilities may be accepting or

stigmatizing. Whether one’s attitudes are fair and accepting or unfair and discriminating can

only be determined after an individual honestly reflects on experiences, thoughts, and feelings.

Four Stages of Diversity: A Model for Looking at Inclusion

Emma Van der Klift & Norman Kunc (1994) identified four possible stages to diversity

with respect to the inclusion of people with disabilities in our society: (a) marginalization, (b)

reform, (c) tolerance, and (d) value. Kunc, a social worker with severe cerebral palsy, a condition

that begins at birth, is a true expert. He has studied the phenomenon through personal

experience as well as from an academic perspective. Although identified twenty years ago,

these stages continue to be applicable.

In the least diverse stage, marginalization, people who have disabilities are avoided

and segregated from the rest of the community. The disability or difference does not need to

be addressed because the person is not included with the majority of the community. For the

most part, the American education system and cultural arts institutions have advanced from this

stage. Recognition that everyone has the right to a free and appropriate public education and

access to the arts and recreation is now required by law and accepted by most citizens (ADA,

1990; IDEA, 2004).

30

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

The next stage of diversity is reform in which people with disabilities are

acknowledged, but need to be changed or rehabilitated in order to become as much like the

majority community as possible. Kunc (Van der Klift & Kunc,1994) described how emotionally

debilitating his physical therapy, occupational therapy, and special education experiences were

while he was in school. He never felt good enough, no matter how hard he worked, because

he could never become “normal.” Most often in a reform-oriented situation, people with

disabilities are expected to adjust to the rest of the world with minimum accommodations and

adaptations. In many situations we have progressed beyond this stage as well.

This stage can be equated with the so-called medical model, which guides attitudes

in many medical and mental health environs. Because of the need for assessment, adaptive

equipment, medication, etc. by doctors, clinical psychologists, educational psychologists, and

other professionals, people with disabilities are frequently perceived through the lens of the

medical model. This approach identifies the disability as pathology within the person, who

as a patient/client needs to be healed, cured, or somehow fixed (Band, Lindsay, Neelands, &

Freakley, 2011; Mackelprang & Salsgiver, 1999).

A more diverse worldview benevolently tolerates those who are different from the

majority. This includes making accommodations for participants and including them, but

treating them more or less as mascots who could not possibly understand, appreciate, or

participate in the full experience. Mascot inclusion is often celebrated on TV news programs,

newspaper feature stories, and YouTube clips when a student with a disability gets to

participate on a sports team by sitting on the sidelines in uniform and finally getting to

play in the last few minutes of a game that is either a guaranteed loss or a guaranteed win.

Toleration inclusion can be found in arts programs, too. If someone sings off-key in the chorus,

she can be told to stand on stage with others and mouth the words to the songs. If an actor

can’t memorize lines, he can be part of the crowd scenes in the play and murmur, “Rhubarb,

rhubarb…” along with the other extras. All the adults and typically developing students pat

themselves on the back for being so kind by allowing their special friends to participate.

Whenever this happens, an opportunity for true inclusion has been missed.

31

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

The most diverse situation is when all people are valued, and everyone is accepted

and welcomed as equal participants. This means leaders and educators involved in an arts

program realize that creativity is an innate part of the human condition and that all of us,

regardless of ability or disability, have unique ideas to contribute and the ability to express (or

learn to express) feelings, thoughts, and ideas in an artistic medium. This is occurring more

often as theatre educator-practitioners create inclusive theatre companies around the country,

and research begins to show ways in which arts programs contribute to the development,

education, and emotional growth of all students (Catterall, 2009; Catterall et al., 2012; Dunbar,

2008; Posner, Rothbart, Sheese, & Kieras, 2008).

Medical Model versus Social Model

In an inclusive drama group accommodations are most effective and welcoming when

made through the lens of the social model of disability. This approach identifies the impairment

as a barrier within the environment and social milieu, not within the person. The disability is

not the problem; the fault lies in society’s failure to remove the barriers to full participation

(Band, et al., 2011; Linker, 2013; Mackelprang & Salsgiver, 1999). The teacher/director who

makes accommodations from this perspective looks at the removal of barriers as a positive

challenge, as opposed to a burden.

The Pygmalion Effect

One positive attitudinal ingredient inclusive teachers can employ is the Pygmalion Effect

(Rosenthal, 1994; Rumain, 2010). In the 1960’s, social psychologist Robert Rosenthal discovered

that when a teacher believes a student can succeed, she communicates it to the student

verbally, nonverbally, and through the amount of time she devotes to the student. From the

spoken and unspoken expectations, the student develops a sense of self-efficacy (“I can do

it because my teacher believes I can do it.”), and applies herself to the work. The result is the

student tends to achieve more success at the assigned task. This success, in turn, contributes

to the development of stronger self-efficacy and continued hard work. The Pygmalion Effect

applies to one student or a whole group of students. The motivation students feel and the level

of intensity they apply to their work depends first and foremost on the teacher’s attitude.

32

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

Thus, teachers must believe that their students have the potential to express themselves

through drama. Students will absorb that belief and believe it, too. When referred to as actors,

they will behave as actors. When told to behave “professionally,” they will.

Foundational Strategies for Inclusive Theatre Arts

When drama teachers and theatre directors look for dramatic strengths and cultivate

the imaginations of all their students, the joy of each participant’s humanity and unique talents

are tapped and celebrated. Drama teachers and directors who do not have previous special

education training may worry about their inexperience in making appropriate accommodations

and, therefore, hesitate to encourage students with disabilities to join their classes and

productions. This is a normal apprehension; however, making appropriate accommodations can

be readily learned and will create a more diverse, rich learning environment for everyone.

Theatre teachers and directors are already skilled at accommodation whether they

realize it or not. They tend to convey information through a more open and needs-based

approach than a rigid, prescriptive one. Artistic communication is usually individualized

for each actor, as each receives and processes direction differently. Many of the following

inclusion practices lead to more effective teaching over all. Foundational strategies and

accommodations include (a) setting clear rules and boundaries, (b) flexibility, (c) making

adjustments in communication style, and (d) utilizing 21st century technology.

Clear rules and boundaries. The structure of a drama class or play rehearsal is different

from that of a general academic classroom and therefore the rules of behavior change. In

some ways, there is less structure: the space is usually open, without chairs and desks; the

participants interact with each other and use their whole bodies to express themselves; and

a display of emotions is expected in relation to the drama game, character, or scene being

explored. In other ways, there is more structure: audience and observers sit in one area while

actors are in another; the audience must be quiet, pay attention while watching a performance

and be willing to provide constructive feedback after it; rules must be followed in drama

games or they fall apart; and respectful behavior toward others is essential. Because of this, it

is important to create behavioral limits and expectations that are clear at the start of the drama

experience.

33

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

In the first drama session explain what the expectations are and generate a list of rules

with the students. In the case of rehearsals for a play, a written contract that describes the

behavior required of a dedicated actor is often the best procedure. When rules or contracts

are broken, sit down with the actors to discuss what behaviors will create a more respectful

environment for all. An individual interaction with the rule breaker may sometimes be more

appropriate to have before a group discussion because the infraction may be out of his

physical or cognitive control. Questions may need to be asked of parents, teachers, or other

individuals who know the actor well to determine if the cause of the infraction is due to the

need for an accommodation. The actors need to feel responsible for their interactions with

each other so that an ensemble can develop. With practice, young actors will ultimately learn

to be responsible for managing their own behaviors. The pay-off is having fun, developing

friendships, and presenting a successful performance.

Flexibility. Flexibility is a universal quality found in all drama techniques. There

are innumerable versions of drama games. Many games require no changes to be played

successfully by everyone in a group. Others may be too complex, abstract, or physically active

for certain students to play successfully. When this happens, another version of the same

game that is simpler, more concrete, or has slightly different rules can be substituted without

changing the targeted skill to be learned. For example, the mirror game is a common drama

game used to teach observation skills, eye contact, body control, teamwork, and trust. Two

actors face each other and take turns being the leader and the follower, as if the leader were

looking in a mirror, with the ultimate goal of moving together as one. A student who has vision

impairments would have difficulty seeing a partner and following his movements; however,

there is a version in which the partners touch hands; this would allow both partners to follow

each other more easily.

Adjustments in communication style. To fully include all students in a drama

experience, information should be communicated multi-modally — orally, through visual

examples and demonstrations, and in small chunks one step at a time. Many times when an

activity is familiar, we forget all the separate components that have to be completed in order

34

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

to accomplish the whole. Before explaining a game, take the time to think through all the

different steps involved. There may be more than you remember, or you may have combined

two separate parts into one unit. When you think you have broken the activity down to all its

individual components, check through once more to see if they are truly broken down enough.

Give actors directions in small chunks, demonstrating what the actors should do as

they do it with you. For instance, to give directions for the mirror game say, “Find a partner.”

Find a partner, and wait until each actor in the group has found a partner. Then say, “Face your

partner.” Face your partner, and wait until each pair has faced each other. When the actors

have done this, say, “I will be the leader and my partner will follow all of my movements.

She will try to copy my movements so closely that she will look like my reflection in a mirror.

Like this.” Demonstrate with your partner. Then say, “The partner facing that side of the

room [point to a wall in the room] will be the first leader and the partner facing the other

side [point to the opposite wall] will be the first follower. Let’s try this for about 15 seconds

to make sure everyone understands.” If they are able to correctly mirror each other, ask the

actors to continue in their current roles and assure them that everyone will get to play both

roles. If a duo is unclear about what to do, explain again with demonstration. When everyone

understands, begin the game. Students who have difficulties with sequencing or short-term

memory will be able to follow this kind of step-by-step approach. Even typically developing

students can have difficulty remembering all the actions for a new game or be unable to

remember them in the correct order, so they will benefit from this kind of presentation, too.

Present directions through positive statements, rather than negative ones: say what

the actors should do instead of what they should not do. Negative statements often offer no

alternative action to take, while a positive statement always provides a clear alternative action.

For example, if an actor is standing too close to the edge of the stage, instead of saying,

“Don’t get so close to the edge of the stage,” say, “Come over here with the rest of the

group” or “Please, stand center stage.”

Do not assume that all of the actors will understand theatre jargon or all idioms,

figures of speech, or metaphors you use. Many people with and without disabilities are shy

35

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

about asking questions about the meaning of a new term or an odd phrase. Going over

stage terminology may be review for some actors, but will be new information to others. Stop

whenever you see someone’s eyes glaze over as you are brilliantly (you think) explaining a

character’s motivations or the historical details of the time in which the play is set. Double

check to make sure everyone understands what you are talking about. Actors are more apt to

ask for an explanation when given the opening to ask by the leader.

Technology. In our technological age, there is equipment and media available to

remove barriers and provide accommodations for inclusion of all students. Line memorization

is one of the big concerns actors with and without disabilities have. It tends to be one theatre

chore no one enjoys doing; however, line memorization becomes much easier if an early read-

through of the script is audio-recorded, and the actors are given copies to listen to at home.

In addition to hearing a scene as a unit of action, the actor is able to listen to his lines and the

cues that come immediately before them. Once the lines become familiar through passive

listening, the actor can press the pause button on the recorder right after a cue, fill in what he

remembers as his line, and check it immediately by pressing the play button. Two actors who

have a scene together can practice their lines over the phone between rehearsals or through

instant messaging on their computers or iPads. Dances and blocking can be videotaped and

watched at home.

Actors who have difficulty speaking may have an augmented communication device to

provide audible words for them. The user types words on a keyboard and when the sentence

is complete, presses a button. A mechanical voice speaks the words. Many of these devices

can have lines recorded or programmed into them. When the actor hears his cue, he pushes a

button and the machine delivers the line.

Actors who have difficulty writing can use an unobtrusive digital recorder to capture

blocking during rehearsal or notes given by the director after a run through of the play. These

can be replayed later and transcribed by a friend or parent or just listened to again. This

technique may be just as useful for someone who just has horrible handwriting and can never

36

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

decode what he’s written. Dragon and other voice-to-text applications can be downloaded

onto smart phones or iPads. Recorded audio automatically turns into text.

Identifying other types of accommodations. The teacher/director does not have to

be an expert on accommodations, particularly if he or she is willing to ask for help. Individuals

who address environmental and programmatic barriers all the time often have developed

very resourceful techniques for creating access. Asking the actor, his parents, or his special

education teachers how he might better accomplish a task may provide an answer directly.

Another source for specific accommodations might be the student’s IEP (Individual Education

Plan), which lists accommodations that the student needs in the classroom. If you are a teacher

in the school, you have access to this document.

Some actors can have difficulty orienting in space, and as a result, are not able to

remember their blocking. A solution can be to structure their entrances and exits to coincide

with another actor who does not have spatial challenges. If Hank, who has spatial challenges,

knows to exit every time Sue exits, and Sue knows to be sure Hank always exits with her, Hank

will not get lost onstage. While lines are not permitted to be added to plays licensed from play

publishers because of copyright laws, non-verbal communication – a look, an inclination of the

head, a gesture – can serve as a visual cue.

Some actors may hesitate when it is time to make an entrance. Another actor entering

at the same time can make sure the hesitant actor comes on with him. If the entrance must be

made alone, the stage manager or her assistant can be by the entrance to “push” the actor out

of the wings. One actor, who was making his entrances too slowly, was quietly reminded by the

stage manager to “walk like you do at Special Olympics competitions.” This timely reminder

always got him moving at the correct pace.

There are clever ways to help actors who have trouble with lines. A detective

interrogating a criminal could have his questions written on his detective’s pad. A newspaper

or TV interviewer could use a clipboard or notebook to list questions. Doctors, scientists, or

other professional characters could have lines, cues, or questions written on their clipboard.

37

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

To make this kind of adaptation believable the actor needs to practice using the prop as a

memory enhancer, instead of reading everything directly off the clipboard. Having this kind of

prop often relieves the anxiety actors have and provides them with something to manipulate in

character.

Non-traditional casting can be applied to disabilities as much as it can to ethnicity and

race. Actors who use wheelchairs and other mobility devices do not have to be cast in roles of

invalids who need wheelchairs. Dorothy could potentially roll down the Yellow Brick Road. By

the same token, there is nothing wrong with incorporating a wheelchair into a play as a throne

that moves, a carriage, ambulance, cab, or other conveyance. With a small wagon attached to

the back of his motorized wheelchair an actor in a modern version of Cinderella drove Cindy to

the ball. A walker can become a medical cart, a maid’s cleaning wagon, or the butler’s cocktail

cart. Actors enjoy creatively transforming their adaptive devices into integral aspects of the

play, and the audience does, too.

Few resources are available in print about adaptive or inclusive theatre. The book

Barrier-Free Theatre: Including Everyone in Theatre Arts (Bailey, 2010) is one resource for

finding ideas for theatre accommodations.

Developing Original Plays for Inclusive Groups

Published plays written by non-disabled playwrights do not always lend themselves

to actors who have disabilities. Sometimes it becomes necessary to create the script around

the specific talents, strengths, and interests of the actors in the company. Great playwrights

throughout history have used this approach. Aeschylus, Sophocles, and other ancient Greek

playwrights wrote for amateur actors in the city of Athens who performed their plays as part of

the community festivals in honor of the god Dionysus (Brockett, 1968). William Shakespeare

wrote for members of The Lord Chamberlain’s Men, his acting company in Elizabethan

England, as did Moliere for his acting company in 17th century France (Brockett, 1968).

Involving actors in the creation of a play immerses them in all aspects of theatre from

the development of characters, dialogue, and structure of the play to its implementation on

stage. This provides a deep learning experience in all aspects of theatre. As Hamlet would say,

38

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

you can “Suit the action to the word, the word to the action” (Shakespeare, 1942, p. 1068) in a

very organic way.

The best way to start this process is to let ideas for the play come from the

actors. A brainstorming session will allow the actors to contribute all the ideas they think would

be exciting for a play. Re-creating a movie or show on television is not a good idea, because

they are often copyrighted and their already established plot and characters will restrict the

group’s creativity when they begin to improvise. However, those shows are often the first

suggestions made by young actors because that is what they are exposed to most frequently.

Even though using those ideas would not be optimum material, write every suggestion down

on a large piece of paper or white board so everyone feels heard. Often a theme develops

when the ideas are seen as a group. The actors may be drawn to melodramas, mysteries, or

thrillers. The leader can point out what genre categories are represented and propose a play

based on the most popular, such as a crime story, a hospital drama, a superhero adventure,

or a horror spoof. Another option is to focus on character types that actors are interested in

portraying. Developing stories from characters in conflict is the basis of all drama.

If the suggestions seem far ranging and consensus looks difficult, take an interest vote.

Allow every person to vote for all the ideas he or she likes. Tally the votes and see which four

or five have the most votes. These will be the “hot” ideas. There may be a way to combine

two or three of them and satisfy most, if not all, of the actors. For instance, scientists, spies,

and zombies, came together to become Scientific Blunders or Don’t Try This Experiment at

Home, a science fiction play in which drinking the wrong chemical formula almost led to the

Zombie Apocalypse. Pirates, ninjas, mermaids, and dragons became High Tide Troubles, an

island adventure in which stranded pirates joined forces with the native ninjas and mermaids to

keep the dragons that lived in the volcano from blowing up the island. Interest in soap operas,

romance, and hospitals became Heart Beat, a melodrama in which the romantic entanglements

of doctors and nurses put their patients’ lives at risk.

Once the topic is chosen, brainstorming can continue about potential characters,

conflicts they might have, locations where the play or specific scenes might take place, and

39

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

other details that the director can use to create improvisational situations. If a group is highly

verbal, recording improvisations can be helpful. Scenes with wonderful lines can be transcribed

and incorporated into the script. Character situations and relationships that develop in

improvisations suggest ideas for conflicts, plot points, and character motivations or for further

improvisational development.

Whether the teacher/director is recording improvisations or just taking notes, at some

point the major conflict must be chosen so characters in a specific storyline can be developed.

After experiencing different kinds of characters through participating in the improvisations, the

actors will have ideas about the kind of role they would like to have in the play. Giving actors

a first, second, and third choice of character allows them to have a say in casting and provides

the director with leeway in balancing the roles. A Western with all heroes or all villains will not

work as well as one with good guys and bad guys. Some actors are more flexible than others

and will say, “I’m open. I’ll play anything.” Other actors have their hearts set on specific roles.

The director will want to cast actors in roles that provide the appropriate challenge for his/her

current artistic development. Giving the actors choice is important, but ultimately the director

will make the final decision.

Casting the play before beginning the writing process is very helpful. The playwright

(who may be the director or may be different company member) can cast actors in groups with

a balance of skills and strengths to accommodate for specific weaknesses. Actors with strong

concentration and a good memory for movement can assist actors who are easily distracted or

spatially challenged. Actors good at memorization can have more lines, and they can be given

lines that cue actors who are not as good at memorization under the guise of asking them

questions or issuing commands. Special talents and abilities can be included, such as playing

an instrument, skating, dancing, singing, juggling, or doing pratfalls.

In performance an actor strong in improvisation skills can save a scene if the other

actors forget their lines by getting the necessary information out, asking questions, or making

comments that remind the other actors what they were supposed to say or do. Whether written

in the script or improvised, the actor who is motivating the response needs to phrase cues in a

40

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

positive manner so the receiving actor understands what to do. For instance, instead of saying

“Don’t go in there!” say, “Stay out here with me! I’m scared!” The receiving actor has been

given a specific action to take and a motivation for it: in this case, to protect and comfort the

motivating actor.

Lines can be created that each actor is able to articulate, avoiding speech challenges. If

a word is difficult to pronounce or a phrase is too long to remember, it can be changed. When

an actor is difficult to understand because of volume level or speech difficulties, adjustments

can be made in the script. For instance, an actor who has difficulties with articulation could play

a character who speaks a foreign language and has a translator. In Prometheus through Time

the prophetess Cassandra, who was very shy in real life, whispered her lines to her Oracle, then

her Oracle spoke for her.

Another scripted option for handling actors who are difficult to understand is to write

the lines so a different character repeats key words or phrases. This way the audience knows

what has just been said. For instance, if one character is accused of stealing a diamond, he

might say, “I didn’t do it!” and the police inspector might respond, “You didn’t do it? Do you

expect me to believe that?” This line repetition technique can be used subtly. If the actor with

verbal challenges says, “I’m tired. I’m going to sleep,” the other actor might respond, “If I’m

going to stay awake all night watching these cows, you are going to stay awake with me.” Even

though the exact line is not repeated, the meaning comes across in context.

Video or audio clips could be integrated into the play. Whatever is recorded will not

need to be remembered during the performance; it is permanently set. While lines will need to

be learned for the recording session, they will not need to be remembered or rehearsed after

the shoot. If an actor is having difficulty with lines, a scene can be shot multiple times until a

take is just right.

Memorization of lines and the understanding of characters’ motivation are often easier

in an original script because the actors have created the characters and dialogue themselves

during the script development process. In many ways script development becomes the

exploratory part of the rehearsal process. By the time the show is being blocked, the actors

already have a clear idea of who their characters are.

41

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

A different kind of pride results when actors create their own play from initial idea

to final performance. The suggestions above are just a few of the many ways a play can be

created to highlight the strengths of a group while mitigating their weaknesses. See Barrier-

Free Theatre (Bailey, 2010) for more suggestions for devising and writing inclusive plays.

Conclusion

The dramatic arts, processes and products, should not be reserved for an elite

few nor experienced only by members of society who do not have disabilities. Drama is the

birthright of every human being and a natural form of exploration and learning. Narrative,

character, dialogue, and imagination are intrinsic to the way all humans think and function.

Participating in the arts invites people with disabilities to develop the full range of their social

and emotional abilities (Bailey, 2010; Chasen, 2011; Gallo-Lopez & Rubin, 2012). They gain

confidence and self-efficacy, practice for real life situations, and make connections with others

of all backgrounds (Bailey, 2010; Chasen, 2011; Gallo-Lopez & Rubin, 2012). Inclusive theatre is

a powerful tool for contributing to a democratic and diverse society. Every city and town should

have at least one barrier-free theatre program, because inclusive theatre experiences are in the

vanguard of creating a society in which everyone is equal and valued.

A Sample of Organizations with Inclusive Companies

Actual Lives Austin, 3710 Cedar Street, Suite 7; Austin, TX 78705.

Website: http://www.actualives.org/index.htm

ArtStream, 620 Pershing Drive; Silver Spring, MD 20910.

Website: https://www.art-stream.org

Awareness Theatre Company, Burlington, VT.

Website: http://www.vsavt.org/public-awareness/awareness-theater-company/

Barrier-Free Theatre, a joint project of the City of Manhattan Parks and Recreation Department,

1101 Poyntz Avenue; Manhattan, KS 66502; the Manhattan Arts Center, 1520 Poyntz

Avenue; Manhattan, KS 66502; and the Drama Therapy Program, Kansas State

University; 109 McCain; Manhattan, KS 66506.

42

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

Dionysus Theatre, 5300 N. Braeswood #226; Houston, Texas 77096.

Website: http://dionysustheatre.org/pages/home.asp

Friendship Theatre, City of Federal Way Parks and Recreation Department; Federal Way, WA.

Website: http://itallhappenshere.org/recreationinclusion.html

Imagination Stage, 4908 Auburn Avenue; Bethesda, Maryland 20814.

Website: www.imaginationstage.org.

Interact Theatre, Colonial Warehouse Building, 212 Third Avenue North, Suite 140;

Minneapolis, MN 55401. Website: http://www.interactcenter.com

Magic Moments, P.O. Box 97; Littleton, CO 80160.

Website: http://www.magicmomentsinc.org

Open Circle Theatre, 500 King Farm Blvd., #102; Rockville, MD 20850.

Website: http://www.opencircletheatre.org

Positive Action Community Theatre, 535 Encinitas Blvd., Suite 101; Encinitas, CA. 92024

Website: http://www.pacthouse.org.

Short Center Repertory Company, Sacramento, CA.

Website: http://ddso.org/programs/short-center-repertory-scr/

Special Gifts Theatre, P.O. Box 2231; Northbrook, IL 60065

Website: http://specialgiftstheatre.org

Stone Belt Community Playback Troup, 550 South Adams Street; Bloomington, IN.47403.

Website: http://www.stonebelt.org/

True Story Project, Visible Theatre, NYC, NY. Website: http://www.visibletheatre.org

Unified Theatre, Hartford, CT. Website: www.unifiedtheatre.org.

43

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

References

Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, Pub. L. No. 101-336, 104 Stat. 328 (1991).

Bailey, S. D. (1993). Wings to fly: Bringing theatre arts to students with special needs.

Rockville, MD: Woodbine House.

Bailey, S. (2010). Barrier-free theatre: Including everyone in theatre arts – in schools, recreation

and arts programs – regardless of (dis)ability. Eumenclaw, WA: Idyll Arbor.

Band, S. A., Lindsay, G. Neelands, J. & Freakley, V. (2011). Disabled students in the performing

arts – Are we setting them up to succeed? International Journal of Inclusive Education,

15(9), 891-908.

Bodova, E., & Leong, D. (2006). Tools of the mind: The Vygotskian approach to early childhood

education, 2nd ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-Hall.

Brockett, O. G. (1968). A history of the theatre. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Brooke, S. L. (Ed.). (2006). Creative arts therapies manual: A guide to the history, theoretical

approaches, assessment, and work with special populations of art, play, dance, music,

and poetry therapies. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas Publisher.

Brooke, S. L. (Ed.). (2009). The use of creative therapies with autism spectrum disorders.

Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas Publisher.

Catterall, J. S. (2009). Doing well and doing good by doing art: A 12-year longitudinal study of

arts education – Effects on the achievements and values of young adults. Los Angeles:

I-Group Books.

Catterall, J. S., Dumais, S. A., & Hampden-Thompson, G. (2012). The arts and achievement in

at-risk youth: Findings from four longitudinal studies: Research report #55. Washington,

DC: National Endowment for the Arts.

Chasen, L. (2011). Social skills, emotional growth and drama therapy: Inspiring connection on

the autism spectrum. London: Jessica Kingsley Publisher.

Cozolino, L. (2006). The neuroscience of human relationships: Attachment and the developing

brain. New York: W.W. Norton.

Descollonges, H., & Eisner, E. (2003). Protecting our children from the arts: Ten not-so-serious

recommendations for policy makers. American School Board Journal, 190(10), 28-31.

44

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

Dunbar, K. N. (2008). Art education, the brain, and language. In Carolyn Asbury & Barbara Rich

(Eds.). Learning, arts, and the brain: The Dana consortium report on arts and cognition.

Washington, DC: Dana Press.

Eisner, E. W. (2002). The arts and the creation of mind. New Haven: Yale University Press.

Fowler, C. (1996). Strong arts: Strong schools. New York: Oxford University Press.

Gallo-Lopez, L., & Rubin, L. C. (Eds.). (2012). Play-based interventions for children and

adolescents with autism spectrum disorders. New York: Routledge.Individuals with

Disabilities Education Act, 20 USC (2004). § 1400 (2004).

Larson, G. O. (1997). American canvas: An arts legacy for our communities. Washington, DC:

National Endowment for the Arts.

Linker, B. (2013). On the borderland of medical and disability history: A survey of the fields.

Bulletin of the History of Medicine, 87(4), 499-535.

Lister, S., Tanguay, D. Snow, S., & D’Amico, M. (2009). Development of a creative arts therapies

center for people with developmental disabilities. Art Therapy, 26(1), 34-37.

Mackelprang, R. & Salsgiver, R. (1999). Disability: A diversity model approach in human service

practice. Pacific Grove, CA: Brookes/Cole Publishing Company.

National Endowment for the Arts. (1988). Toward civilization: Overview from a report on arts

education. Washington, DC: National Endowment for the Arts.

National Endowment for the Arts (2011). The arts and human development: Framing a national

research agenda for the arts, lifelong learning, and individual well-being. Washington,

DC: National Endowment for the Arts.

Parsad, B., Spiegelman, M., & Coopersmith, J. (2011). A snapshot of arts education in public

elementary and secondary schools: 2009-10. Washington, DC: U.S. Dept. of Education.

Picasso, P. Pablo Picasso: Paintings, quotes, and biography. Retrieved Nov. 2, 2013 from www.

pablopicasso.org.

Posner, M., Rothbart, M. K., Sheese, B. E., & Kieras, J. (2008). How arts training influences

cognition. In Carolyn Asbury & Barbara Rich (Eds.). Learning, arts, and the brain: The

Dana consortium report on arts and cognition. Washington, DC: Dana Press.

45

EXEMPLARY THEATRE PRACTICES

Rosenthal, R. (1994). Interpersonal expectancy effects: A 30-year perspective, Current

Directions in Psychological Science, 3(6), 176-179.

Rumain, B. (2010). How can we help our children succeed? Insights from the psychological

literature. Education, 131(2), 315-318.

Sarason, S. (1990). The challenge of art to psychology, New Haven: Yale University Press.

Shakespeare, W. (1942). Hamlet. The complete plays and poems of William Shakespeare.

Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company.

Snow, S., D’Amico, M., Tanguay, D. (2003). Therapeutic theatre and well-being. The Arts in

Psychotherapy,30(2), 73-82.

Strategic National Arts Alumni Project (SNAAP). (2012). 2011 & 2012 Aggregate Frequency

Report. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University.

Strategic National Arts Alumni Project (SNAAP). (2013). An uneven canvas: Inequalities in

artistic training and careers: 2013 annual report. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University.

Sternberg, P., & Garcia, A, (2000). Sociodrama: Who’s in your shoes? 2nd Ed. Westport, CT:

Praeger.

Van der Klift, E., & Kunc, N. (1994). Hellbent on helping: Benevolence, friendship, and the

politics of help. In J. Thousand, R. Villa, & A. Nevin (Eds.), Creativity and collaborative

learning: A practical guide to empowering students and teachers. Baltimore: Paul

Brookes.

Vygotsky, L. (1994) The problem of the cultural development of the child. In R. Van Der Veer &

J. Alsiner (Eds.). The Vygotsky reader. Cambridge, MA: Blackwell Publishers.

Weininger, O. (1979). Play and education: The basic tool for early childhood learning.

Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas Publisher.

Weininger, O. (1988). “What If” and “As If”: Imagination and pretend play in early childhood.

In K. Egan & D. Nadaner, (Eds.), Imagination and education (pp. 141-52). New York, NY:

Teacher’s College Press, Columbia University.

Whitehurst, T., & Howells, A. (2006). ‘When something is different people fear it’: children’s

perceptions of an arts-based inclusion project. Support for Learning, 21, 40-44.

46

Visual Theatre: Building a Bridge for Student Success

TIM MCCARTY

Quest Visual Theatre staff and artists are committed to the creation, production,

facilitation, and presentation of inclusive visual theatre. The company’s education program,

TheatreBridge, focuses on the use of visual theatre to enhance learning readiness and literacy

skills in all students, but particularly students who are struggling in school and frustrated by

reading and writing. From 2010 to 2014, Quest company members conducted research on the

impact of its arts integration, visual theatre approach with Deaf and hard-of-hearing students

attending the Maryland School for the Deaf (MSD) in Columbia, Maryland. They also provided

professional development to educators across the United States and around the world as

part of the TheatreBridge Program. Quest staff and artists regularly conduct TheatreBridge

residencies in schools and communities nationally and internationally.

This paper provides an overview of the TheatreBridge program, with an explanation

of visual theatre and its application to the classroom. The paper also provides insight to

TheatreBridge’s assessment tools and research findings.

What is Visual Theatre?

Movement is the central organizing principle in visual theatre. Performers communicate

information, relationships, and emotions primarily through movement, such as traditional

mime, various forms of dance, sign language, gesture, and circus arts. Other visual theatre

choices include puppetry and masks. Visual theatre is not necessarily silent or non-verbal. It

may contain spoken word, music, or other sound. It also may contain multimedia elements such

as video or projections. However, the essential meaning of any visual theatre piece transpires

through its visual vernacular.

Imagine that you are watching a movie and you turn off the sound. If you can follow the

action and the visual elements of the movie, that gives you an idea of visual theatre. When the

Quest company members are building a new show, the director and ensemble will often ask

this question about a scene that they created, “Does it read?” This means, can an audience

comprehend the scene and its’ visual base.

47

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

Some examples of well-known professional companies that create and perform visual

theatre include: Cirque du Soliel, Blue Man Group, Pilobolus Dance Theatre and Bill Irwin.

The Academy Award winning movie, “The Artist,” is a film based largely on visual theatre

principles.

A Rationale for Visual Theatre in the Classroom

TheatreBridge builds upon the ever-growing body of research that demonstrates the

benefits of integrating the arts into education. The Arts Education Partnership publication

Champions of Change provided a valuable review of literature that convincingly draws the

connection between the arts and student success. For Quest’s TheatreBridge purposes,

Champions for Change noted that one of the “critical research findings” was that the arts

effectively “levels the playing field” for disadvantaged students. (Catterall, Chapleau, &

Iwanaga, 1999, p. 8).

TheatreBridge particularly draws upon research that explores links between arts and

literacy. In a study of how visualization and theatre instructional strategies impacted reading

comprehension skills of fourth graders with cognitive disabilities, Lowell (2013) suggested that

students “significantly increased” their reading comprehension. In a study of reluctant readers,

Wilhelm (1995) discovered that students who use art to visualize a story they are reading

enjoy the reading and begin to use and play with story words. Crumpler and Schneider (2002)

explored the connections between reading, writing and theatre with first, second and third

graders. After reading Maurice Sendak’s book “Where the Wild Things Are,” (1963) students

assumed roles from the story and acted out the book. Then, the students recalled their reading

and performance experiences to write about things that interested them from the story. This

enabled students to experience the story from a variety of perspectives and employ a variety of

academic skills (reading, performing, writing), which led to a greater understanding of the story

and an increase in the sophistication of their writing.

Over the last four years, TheatreBridge, has focused research on the following goals:

1. Increase opportunities for Deaf and hard-of-hearing elementary and middle school

students to engage in standards-based arts education in the core curriculum.

48

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

2. Strengthen standards-based arts instruction for Deaf and hard-of-hearing students in

elementary and middle grades.

3. Improve the academic performance and literacy skills for Deaf and hard-of-hearing

children in those grades.

The Maryland School for the Deaf has served as a valuable laboratory for

TheatreBridge’s research. The Quest staff and MSD teachers, aides, administrators, parents,

and students have individually and collectively explored elements of visual theatre in the

classroom.

Building Culturally Appropriate Learning Environments

Quest’s TheatreBridge Program encourages teachers to create supportive, visually

and kinesthetically based environments that are culturally appropriate for students with

communication challenges.

The reading level of Deaf people of all ages in the United States remains below the

4th-grade level (Morere, 2011). A variety of factors contribute to the Deaf and hard-of-hearing

student’s ability to read and write well. Ninety percent of children who are Deaf are born to

hearing parents who often do not discover their child’s deafness until they are nearly one year

old (Azbel, 2004). These parents typically have no experience with or knowledge of deafness,

and they face significant challenges in communicating with and raising their Deaf child. Their

children often do not develop a foundation in a primary language during their critical early

months and years, and they are not ready to learn to read and write by kindergarten. Even

for a child who enters school fluent in signed communication at an age-appropriate level,

the process of learning to read and write English, which is essentially a foreign language

to the child, is daunting. The lost time during a child’s formative years combined with the

loss of information from auditory input can contribute to failure for many Deaf and hard of

hearing students (Mayberry 2002). Research indicates that classroom teachers continue to

face challenges in developing and utilizing instructional strategies that lead to significant and

lasting improvement in the literacy skills of Deaf and hard of hearing students (McAnally, Rose

& Quigley, 1999; Stewart & Kluwin, 2001).

49

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

Visual theatre allows students with limited language skills to develop their

communication skills without the barrier that language often presents. In visual theatre, the

student’s body becomes the primary means of communication to the audience. Through visual

theatre games and exercises, students develop their abilities to use imagination, experiences,

ideas, and information to express themselves physically and visually.

It may seem ironic that stripping away language can foster student growth in

communication. However, when teachers incorporate a visual theatre approach in their

classrooms, students with varying levels of language competency have opportunities to

significantly contribute to the creative and critiquing process. Too often when answering

questions or working in small groups, those students who have a greater facility for signed

or spoken language dominate the conversation, frequently leaving out students with weaker

language and communication skills. A visual theatre approach in the classroom provides all

students with opportunities to meaningfully engage in the classroom. Through this process

of visual learning and visual engagement, all students enhance their observation, analytical,

creative, and expressive skills. Students with weak communication skills significantly grow

in their ability to absorb, process and express ideas. Through teacher logs and recorded

interviews, TheatreBridge teachers note that their students gain confidence, feel engaged

in their education, and are enthusiastic about the learning process. TheatreBridge teachers

also note students begin to value each other and recognize each other’s contributions to the

creative and learning environment.

Visual Theatre Games

Theatre games and exercises are a common tool that teachers and directors use in

their classes and rehearsals to develop an actor’s performance skills and a sense of ensemble

in a group. Most theatre games have an improvisational base. This means that the instructor

establishes the rules or circumstances of a game. Then the actors, using the given rules or

circumstances, are free to create characters, dialogue and scenes. Theatre teachers use

games to achieve curricular goals while directors use games to meet the needs of a particular

production of a play.

50

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

Like all theatre training, teachers and directors use visual theatre games and exercises

to develop students’ creative and expressive skills. Visual theatre games should particularly

focus on enhancing the actor’s tools:

•Body

• Imagination

•Experience

The body is the primary tool in visual theatre. Teachers, therefore, must invest time and

care to develop this essential tool. Students must learn how to move effectively in space and

to effectively move each part of their bodies. A visual theatre actor must have the ability to call

upon parts of his or her body to accurately interpret or express images, characters, emotions,

and settings. It is through this movement or the images created by an actor’s body or group of

actors’ bodies, that an audience must read and interpret a scene or sequence. Therefore, when

an actor can effectively utilize his or her body, audience members more readily understand

what the actor or actors are trying to express. This ability to communicate effectively and

with clarity can be challenging, especially with students who are accustomed to people not

understanding them. Empowerment of students to clearly express themselves visually is, in

fact, invaluable for building student success.

However, the ability to move effectively and accurately is not enough to be a good

actor. Actors must convey character, ideas, feelings, and places. Effective visual theatre

games encourage students to use their imagination and experiences to accurately express

a specific character, particular ideas, defined feelings, and certain places. Often, students

have not been encouraged to express themselves lack the ability to do so. They need time,

many opportunities, and constructive feedback to play with ways of creating and expressing

themselves visually, and learn that their ideas are interesting.

With TheatreBridge, Quest staff and artists encourage teachers to weave theatre games

into the classroom throughout the school year. Sometimes, the games are to focus on students’

development of acting or communication skills. However, the key to building student success is

integrating games into the curriculum so that students gain a greater understanding of course

content. The games also become a valuable tool for assessment of student learning.

51

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

Visual Theatre Game Samples

Game outlines included in this paper appear in a “script” format to provide detailed

information (See figures 1 and 2). The Quest Visual Theatre TheatreBridge webpage (http://

www.questvisualtheatre.org/outreach-education/theatrebridge/) includes these and over 60

visual theatre games. These games were originally part of the Maryland Artist Teacher Institute

study guide, which also appears on the Quest website.

Environments game. The outline for Environments presents the game in its basic

format (see Figure 1). In teacher and teaching artist training, the Quest staff encourages

participants to brainstorm ways of adapting each game to the classroom setting. TheatreBridge

classroom teachers have used Environments in a number of ways. Some have used it in its basic

form to work on the learning readiness skills listed at the top of the game outline.

Some teachers have adapted the game to meet science standards and replaced the

environments with weather conditions such as sun, rain, wind, sleet, and snow. To help students

gain a greater understanding of precipitation, teachers have actually spritzed students with

water sprays to experience rain and pelted them with crushed ice while they moved through

sleet. Teachers take photos of students performing in each weather condition. Then, students

draft sentences to match each photo, and students and teachers edit the sentences and create

a Power Point slide show about weather. Teachers project the slide show and the students take

turns signing or speaking the sentences and describe the weather condition.

In English Language Arts (ELA), teachers change the environments to match settings

of a story that they are reading. Another ELA approach is to ask students to assume the role

of one of the characters in a story they are reading. Students identify traits for their character,

and each student must maintain his or her commitment to the character throughout all of the

environments given by the teacher. Each student must move in each environment as his or her

character would and interact with other characters in a way that is appropriate for the story and

the environment. After playing Environments, the teacher asks the students to share what they

have learned about their character and other characters through the game experience.

Big/Little game. In addition to the concepts of size, Big/Little is an excellent game

to help students understand numbers, counting, and value (see Figure 2). Teachers can lead

52

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

students in counting by using their fingers, using flash cards with Arabic numbers, or even

Roman numerals. Switching around with the numbers helps students attend to the sequence

and understand “greater than” or “less than.”

Some TheatreBridge teachers divide students into groups and assign emotions to

each group. The teacher becomes a conductor leading an emotional symphony - the higher

the number, the higher the intensity of the emotions. Students and teachers also can add

adjectives to their emotions or even replace their root word with a more appropriate word. For

example:

Tired

Very Tired

Extremely Tired

Exhausted

Benefits of Visual Theatre Games

With visual theatre games, students play first according to rules provided by their

teacher. Then, they begin to apply that play to important curricular goals and outcomes. The

kinesthetic and intellectual play, along with accompanying discussions, photos of student visual

theatre work, and written assignments, engages students in their educational process. Students

become familiar with the curricular content in various forms. They begin to experience success

in the classroom, and through this success, students begin to build confidence. This confidence

is vital for many students who experience frustration and failure in the classroom.

Tableau

Quest trainers encourage teachers to spiral a variety of visual theatre games into

their curriculum throughout the year, enabling students to develop their visual theatre,

communication, interpersonal and intellectual skills. However, the visual theatre technique that

plays a critical role in student success in the TheatreBridge Program is the tableau.

Tableau is a traditional theatre technique used in many forms of theatre all around the

world. In a tableau, actors create a frozen image or still picture with their bodies. A group can

use the tableau to represent something that they read, a photo or painting that they have

53

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

studied or an idea that they want to express. Because there is no movement, a tableau helps

students identify one or two important ideas and then express those ideas succinctly and with

clarity.

Creation and assessment of tableaus in the classroom touch upon a broad range of

learning and knowledge skills. Bloom’s Taxonomy of Learning Domain (Clark, 2013) provides an

ideal framework for understanding how the tableau process works (see Figure 3).

TheatreBridge teachers often ask their students to create a tableau that visually

represents something that they read in class. To successfully create their tableaus, the students

must utilize all levels of Blooms’ taxonomy.

Remembering: The students must remember the details of the story.

Understanding: Students must understand the story to plan their tableaus.

Applying: Students use details of the story that they then apply to the creation of their

tableaus.

Analyzing: After the students create their first draft, they look critically at photos that the

teacher has taken of their tableaus.

Evaluating: The students critique their work.

Creating: Based upon their self-critique, the students revise their tableaus and share them

with their peers. Their creation of the tableau is not a replication of the story. It is their visual

interpretation of the story.

The tableau sharing, feedback, and revision process offers students several opportunities to

explore the full range of Bloom’s Taxonomy.

The Sharing Process

When creating works like tableaus, students should share their work with peers. Sharing

adds some tension to the process. Knowing they are creating something that is then shared

with others encourages students to think about audience acceptance in the creative process.

(Hattie, 2008).

When first using the sharing process, teachers should clarify roles. Students who are

presenting their work are actors who must commit themselves to the work or performances.

54

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

Those students who are observing the work are audience members who will provide

constructive feedback.

Following the tableau sharing, performers stand in a line in front of the audience. The

performer’s job is to actively listen to feedback, and he or she is not permitted to respond or

explain. If the performers/students are allowed to respond, they are not listening. Instead, they

are preparing their responses to feedback when they should be attending to audience critique.

Audience members must give specific, concrete analysis of the work performed. “I like

it, it was funny, it was good,” is not an acceptable feedback statement. Audience members

must make statements and use descriptive evidence to support those statements. For example,

“I thought the focus was very clear because everyone was looking at Robert.” “I thought the

tableau clearly showed that everyone was sad because each actor frowned and their shoulders

slumped.”

Remaining attentive during the feedback process helps students accept criticism. After

receiving feedback, performing students may choose to ignore the feedback or incorporate

it into their presentations during their next draft. TheatreBridge staff members consider self-

evaluation and peer critique as essential to developing students’ collaborative skills. This

collaborative approach is a valuable part of the students’ overall learning process.

Developing Tableau Skills

Quest’s website includes a variety of visual theatre games that help students develop

their skills to create a tableau. The “freeze” part of the Environments game is the first step

in learning tableau. Many students are not aware of their bodies and how they move or

control their bodies. Taking the time to develop the ability to create interesting pictures as an

individual and as a group is an important part of the tableau process. When creating interesting

tableaus students must:

•Commit their entire body to the picture and the picture’s intent

•Have a clear focal point

•Use a variety of levels

One of the standard games that Quest artists use to teach tableau is “1, 2, 3” (see Figure 4).

Teachers have a variety of options in how they might apply tableau in the classroom. Creating

55

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

tableaus is one of the activities that MSD teachers and students effectively incorporate into

their classes. Tableaus, emphasizing position, motion, expression, and collaboration, are woven

into a myriad of lesson plans in various subjects that form MSD’s core curriculum. For example,

in a second grade MSD class, students learn about nature’s life cycles and specifically study

the life cycle of a frog. Using toys, puppets and flashcards, the teacher introduces students to

vocabulary, such as, “frog, tadpole, eggs.” The students and teacher each have an opportunity

to manipulate the objects and discuss what they know about each vocabulary word. Then

the class moves to a different section of the room where the teacher shows a brief animated

film of the frog’s life cycle. Students discuss the film, and the teacher assists them in using the

vocabulary they have just learned. Finally, the teacher projects a series of pictures depicting the

frog’s life cycle, and the students create a tableau for each picture. The teacher takes a photo

of each tableau, reflecting the students’ interpretation of each picture. Teachers and students

use these photos in a number of ways throughout the unit. Sometimes the teacher projects

the picture and the students explain what is happening. Sometimes the teacher and students

create sentences to caption their photos. The process, most importantly, enables students to

develop a deeper understanding of the information about a frog’s life cycle because of the

active way learning takes place.

MSD teachers have been pleased with how TheatreBridge and the use of tableaus are

working in the classroom. Sixth-year teacher Shannon Negussie, author of the frog cycle lesson

plan, indicated “linking theatre games to the curriculum helps the students learn and retain

information,”

TheatreBridge Lesson Plans

TheatreBridge teachers create theatre-in-education (TIE) lesson plans using a template

that connects Theatre Arts standards to other subject matter standards. See Figure 5 for a

sample lesson plan. More lesson plans are available on the Quest website.

Maginnis’ lesson plan uses visual theatre (fabric play) to allow students the opportunity

to develop and explore character. Student characters begin to interact and a story emerges.

Here the visual theatre serves as the first draft of a story that students create by consensus.

56

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

The plan enables students to complete an English Language Arts (ELA) standard as well

as a Theatre Arts standard. For students struggling with written language, satisfying a basic ELA

standard can be difficult. Through the use of fabric, visual theatre, creative play, brainstorming,

discussion, and story map, Maginnis provides an instructional framework for creating and

identifying the elements of a story. In creating their story, students, using the fabric silently,

develop a character. Through discussion, students identify and give descriptors for their

characters and brainstorm ideas for their story. In writing, students map their story and write

their own scenes for the story. Then, students “read aloud” the scenes they wrote. Students

can continue to redraft their scenes by both performing the scenes and by writing and rewriting

their scripts for the scenes.

When TheatreBridge teachers spiral lesson plans throughout the year, students and

teachers become comfortable with a visual theatre/arts integration approach. More importantly,

the TheatreBridge approach helps build student success in meeting curricular standards. With

each success, TheatreBridge’s research demonstrates that students build confidence, which

leads to more success and the joy of learning.

Measuring Visual Theatre Skills

Quest has developed the TheatreBridge Visual Theatre Rubric for two purposes: (a) to

facilitate students’ development of visual theatre skills; and, (b) to guide teachers in assessing

the visual theatre skills students need to meet curricular goals. The rubric identifies three major

domains and skill sets: visual theatre, motivation, and creativity/composition. Each domain

contains four levels of indicators and descriptions to aid teachers in student assessment. See

Figures 6 and 7 for the domain descriptions and sample rubric.

Quest leaders encourage teachers to use rubrics to plan lessons and assess students’

visual theatre skills at the beginning and end of the school year, measuring progress. The rubric

also serves as a planning tool. Teachers can refer to the rubric to identify visual theatre skill sets

that will help students achieve curricular goals. Some teachers use the rubric along with photos

and videos of student projects and activities in Individualized Education Plan (IEP) meetings,

demonstrating to parents student growth and strategies for continued growth.

57

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

Assessing TheatreBridge’s Impact

In a study conducted September 2011 to June 2013, Quest staff employed a variety

of tools to assess TheatreBridge’s impact. These tools included teacher logs, classroom

observations, the TheatreBridge Rubric, teacher and student interviews, and standardized test

results. In their interviews with the TheatreBridge research team, teachers identified meaningful

academic growth with their students. At the elementary level, this growth included: A greater

retention of learned material; an increase in critical thinking; a greater understanding of

content; and, enhanced story comprehension. At the middle school level teachers observed

that their students: Were better able to internalize skills; improve their language skills; and,

increase their literacy rates.

The study findings indicate that students are more invested in learning and increase

their theatre, communication, and interpersonal skills when they engage in visual theatre

activities that are woven into the curriculum. They more successfully participate in collaborative

learning and gain a greater understanding and retention of content, while teachers noticed a

reduction of inappropriate student behavior and outbursts.

TheatreBridge findings also clearly indicate that teachers have more fun teaching. The

interview excerpt below from a TheatreBridge teacher captures both her and her students’

enthusiasm for the visual theatre process.

All the videotaping we have done. It’s been great for [the students] to sit and watch,

all by themselves, develop these skills [e.g., confidence, risk taking, critique]…We do

film and then the kids come back and they watch their work and then, if time permits,

…I ask them if they are satisfied with it, if they feel it was clear, you know? And they

evaluate their work and then we redo what they feel was not clear…I’ve used the

tableau work repeatedly as a retelling of a story they’ve read, and after we read the

story they determine how they’re going to tell the story again. They become the

characters. They decide how the tableaus should be shared to tell the story and then

they rewrite it. And then, they take the finished book, their book, and they take it to

the third grade class and they tell the story again with their tableaus…And my students

have so improved in their ability to tell a story, with expression and with, like, this love,

58

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

that just gets communicated to the younger kids…Now, it’s the expectation, if they

really like a book, they’ll say, “Can we tableau?” And then, “And can we tell it to the

third grade?” So it’s really been a benefit to both age groups. (MSD TheatreBridge

teacher response during interview)

Conclusion

Many Deaf and hard-of-hearing students enter school academically and socially

delayed. Therefore, parents, teachers, and administrators must work cooperatively to construct

academic, social, and cultural experiences that nurture and challenge these students. What is

clear from the TheatreBridge research is that Quest’s visual theatre/arts integration lays a firm

foundation for student success. In the ensuing years, Quest will continue to seek opportunities

to be part of the community dialogue. Quest’s website will serve as an important education

resource. The TheatreBridge section of the website will include lesson plans, visual theatre

games, research findings and resources related to visual theatre that will be freely available

to anyone. The Quest staff will continue to provide professional development to educators

throughout the world. The company will continue to provide visual theatre residencies in

schools in many settings. Quest’s goal is to create a global community of learners who are

committed to providing all students with a quality education that includes visual theatre.

References

Azbell, L. (2004). How do the Deaf read? The paradox of performing a phonemic task without

sound. Intel Science Talent Search. Retrieved from: http://psych.nyu.edu/pelli/#intel.

Catterall, J. S., Chapleau, R., & Iwanaga, J. (1999). Involvement in the arts and human

development: General involvement and intensive Involvement in music and theater

arts. In E.B. Fiske (Ed.), Champions of change: The impact of the arts on learning (p. 8)

Washington, DC: The Arts Education Partnership and The President’s Committee on the

Arts and the Humanities.

Clark, D. (2013). Bloom’s taxonomy of learning domains. Retrieved from:

http://www.nwlink.com/~donclark/hrd/bloom.html.

59

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

Crumpler, T., & Schneider, J. J. (2002). Writing with their whole being: A cross study f analysis

of children’s writing from five classrooms using process drama. Research in Drama

Education, 7(1), 61-79.

Lowell, K. M. (2013). Visualization and drama based techniques to impact reading

comprehension of a fourth grade student with a cognitive disability (pp. 1-51).

Milwaukee, WI: Cardinal Stitch University.

Mayberry, R. I. (2002), Cognitive development in Deaf children: the interface of language and

perception in neuropsychology. In S.J. Segalowitz & I. Rapin (Eds), Elsevier Science B.V.

Handbook of Neuropsychology, 2nd Edition, Vol. 8, Part II (pp. 71-101). Retrieved from:

http://idiom.ucsd.edu/~rmayberry/pubs/Mayberry-CogDev-Hndbok.pdf.

McAnally, P., Rose, S. & Quigley, S. (1999). Reading Practices with Deaf Learners.

Austin, TX: Pro-Ed.

Morere, D. A. (2011). Visual Language & Visual Learning: Research Brief #4. Gallaudet

University Visual Language Institute. Retrieved from:

http://vl2.gallaudet.edu/assets/section7/document141.pdf.

Sendak, M. (1963). Where the wild things are. New York, NY: Harper & Row.

Stewart, D., & Kluwin, T. (2001). Teaching Deaf and hard-of-hearing students: Content,

strategies, and curriculum. Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon.

Wilhelm, J. D. (1995). Reading is seeing: Using visual response to improve the literary reading

of reluctant readers. Journal of Reading Behavior, 27(4), 467-499.

60

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

EnvironmentsEducational value:

• Increases student’s ability to concentrate•Encourages creativity•Enhances student’s visual imaging skills•Develops a sense of ensemble• Improves student’s ability to recognize and perform patterns and sequences•Encourages students to take risks

[This game requires a space free of impediments and large enough to enable the group to move freely.]We are going to play a game called “Environments.” I’m going to give you a gesture for a particular environment when I sign “go,” you move in that environment until I sign “freeze.”Our first environment is “fog.” I’ll sign it like this (show again). This whole space, this whole room is filled with fog. Imagine what that is like. Ready. Go. [Allow the group to explore and discover and have fun. There should be no talking. After a minute or two sign freeze. Wait until everyone has totally frozen. Keep the freeze sign until there is total stillness. Clap your hands a couple of times and indicate that the participants are to return to their circle.]Our next environment is syrup, but I’ll sign it this way [“sticky”]. This whole room is filled with syrup. Through the magic of theatre you will be able to breath. You won’t die. Imagine

yourself trying to move or walk through “sticky.” Ready “sticky” “go.”

[Same procedure. Your instructions should diminish as you go through the different environments. Be sure to indicate for ice, hot, water 1 inch that the whole floor is that environment.]

Environments Sequence•Fog•Syrup (sticky)• Ice (floor)•Hot (floor)•Water (1 inch)•Water (waist high)•Water (neck high)

[After to you complete the cycle.]Great job. OK, let’s review. What are our environments? First is was…? Then…? [etc]

OK, here we go again. Begin the sequence again, but this time you do not sign “freeze.” Start with “fog” then at some point sign “sticky” several times until most of the group sees

Figure 1. Environments Game

61

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

the new sign. Allow them to adjust and get it right. If someone doesn’t get it, don’t worry about it. They will eventually figure it out. As the sequence goes along, shorten the length of time you sign the next environment. Don’t be too brief, but enough for reasonable number of folks to see it and get it. You want the group to begin to depend on each other and not just you.

Go through the exact same sequence. Then go back to “water” (1 inch). Once everyone is doing that environment, get up on a chair or something to elevate yourself. Begin by gesturing “waves” on a beach. You can make the sound of waves if you want. Keep doing it. Allow the group to figure it out and have fun with it. The sign “freeze.” When they all freeze give them a big round of applause. Then ask them to sit in a circle.]

Sample processing questionsWhen someone responds to a question, repeat and rephrase their response so that everyone gets it and you reinforce the important points.

•What did you discover in that game? What did you learn in that game?• I used my imagination.• I had fun.• I moved differently in different environments? [Follow up question: How?]

•Before you can move in an environment, what did you have to do first?• I had to imagine the environment first [Follow up: Is that important in theatre?]

•Yes. [Why?]•Because to be a character in a play or to do anything in the play well, I

need to have specific image in my head first.]•Did you always know when to stop or change an environment?

•No [The how did you know which environment we were in?]• I had to watch the others in the group. [Is being aware of others on stage

important in theatre?]•Yes [Why?]•Because most of the time you are acting with other people on stage.

[That’s right. So this is a good game to develop a sense of ensemble, a group, everyone working together.]

• Is there a sequence in this game?…What is that sequence? •Are sequences important in theatre?

•Yes [Why?]•Actors must memorize lines or sequences.

Anything else you discovered with this game?

62

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

Figure 2. Big/Little

Big/LittleEducational value:

•Encourages creativity•Enhances student’s visual imaging skills•Develops a sense of ensemble•Encourages students to take risks•Enhances a student’s critical eye•Develops counting and sequencing skills• Increases understanding a numerical values

We’re going to play a game. It’s called “Big and Small.” In this game, you need to pay attention to my instructions. First, we are going to stand up, leave some room between you and the next person. Now just stand in what we call a neutral or relaxed position. We’re now going to make ourselves as big as possible. We are going to first do this as slowly as possible. Are you ready? OK, feel yourself start to grow. You are getting bigger…bigger…bigger. You are so big it feels like you can fill up this room with your whole body. You’re really big. You are huge. Uhoh! I’m getting smaller. I’m slowly getting smaller…smaller…smaller. I’m shrinking. I’m getting small. Now I’m getting teeny. I’m so small. Wow, the room is so big because I am so small. Uhoh! I’m getting bigger…

[And so on. Repeat the big then small a couple of times.] Now that you are big, move about the room as a big, big person. I’m big. I’m really big. Uhoh, I’m getting smaller. .. Now that you are small move around the room as a small, small person…I’m growing again! I’m growing back to…normal. Whew! It feels good to be my size again.

Can anyone tell me something that is really big? (Elephant, tree, house, whale, etc) OK, let’s imagine we are a [object]. Let’s become a big, big [object]. Now, move around as a [object]. Very Good. Now slowly become yourself and your normal size.

Can anyone tell me something that is really small? (ant, bee, fly, atom, etc) OK, let’s imagine we are a [object]. Let’s get small like a [object]. Let move around as a [object]. Very good. Now become yourself and your normal size.

[Repeat the exercise as different things. Then ask for a volunteer to be big like a [object] and someone else to be small as a [object]. ]

Thank you, I want the two of you to move around as [object 1] and [object 2]. Are you ready? Go. Now try to interact with each other.

[Let the two actors interact for a bit.] OK, great! Let’s thank our actors [applause]. Can I have two more volunteers? What should we have them be this time? [Assign the actors two different characters/objects and repeat the activity.]

OK very good. What do you think we learned from this game? [Response]

63

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

Figure 3. Bloom’s Taxonomy

(Clark, 2013)

Creating

Evaluating

Analyzing

Applying

Understanding

Remembering

Bloom’s Taxonomy

Revised edition by Lorin Anderson (as student of Bloom).

64

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

Figure 4: 1, 2, 3 Game

1, 2, 3Educational Value:

• Improves a student’s ability to focus•Promotes a sense of ensemble (enhances the student’s commitment to and contri-

bution to group work)•Develops student’s ability to follow directions•Clarifies vocabulary (interpreting specific emotions)• Improves a student’s physical composition skills•Enhances a student’s critical eye• Improves constructive criticism skills•Enhances student’s ability to accept and use criticism• Increases student’s attention to detail• Increases student’s ability to follow directions

Place an object Left, one Center and one Right.

This is a game about focus and using our body to sculpt pictures. The body is an essential actor’s tool in visual theatre. We need to create pictures that the audience can readily clearly and easily see and understand. Because we have limited time, I’ll give one hint about creating interesting pictures…levels. If we create different levels with our bodies, pictures that the audience might not expect or pictures that have interesting shapes that evoke a thought or feeling, we have a better chance of engaging the audience.

For this game, you well enter from the Right with a general focus. I’ll clap my hands and you rush to #1 and freeze in a tableau. The object is the focus. So no matter what picture you create, you must be looking at the object.

I’ll clap my hands again and you break and walk around with a general focus. I clap again and you rush to #2 to create a second tableau. I clap…general…I clap…tableau for #3.

Note: when you rush to an object, you don’t have to leave the object where it is, you can raise it and thus move the focus. You still need to freeze.

After each group does their tableaus, the audience provides feedback about what worked and didn’t.

After the first group goes, you can add contrasting emotions to the three objects.

At the end of the game, process with the participants about what they learned in this game.

65

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

Figure 5. Sample Lesson Plan

Characters with Fabric for Creative WritingTitle of Lesson: Characters with Fabric for Creative Writing Instructor/Author: Susan MaginnisDate of Actual Lesson: January 25-26, 2012 Grade: 6-8 (Instructional Level: 2)

Arts: Theatre Content Area/Subject: Language Arts

Standards: 3.0 Creative Expression and Production

Standards: 4.0 Writing

Topic/Goal: Students will demonstrate the ability to apply theatrical knowledge, principles, and practices and to collaborative theatre presentations.

Topic/Goal: Students will compose in a variety of modes by developing content, employing specific forms, and selecting language appropriate for a particular audience and purpose.

Indicator/Objectives:1. Use a variety of theatrical elements to

communicate ideas and feelings 1. Create improvisational scenes using

given ideas to develop characters, settings, conflicts, and resolutions

2. Demonstrate knowledge of theatre performance and production skills in formal and informal presentations

1. Use selected posture and movement to enact improvised characters

1. Use collaborative theatre processes to create, perform, and revise scenes that are based on imagination and personal experience

Indicator/Objectives:1. Compose texts using the prewriting and

drafting strategies of effective writers 1. Generate ideas and topics and make a

plan before writing2. Write a first draft with a main idea and

supporting details3. Organize related ideas into a simple

paragraph4. Compose oral, written, and visual

presentations that express personal ideas, inform, and persuade

1. Contribute to a shared writing experience or topic of interest

2. Use sensory details to expand ideas

Vocabulary: improvisation, setting, conflict, resolution

Vocabulary: Main idea, details, adjectives, problem, solution

66

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

Materials:• Multi-color,

large pieces of fabric• Story map

(DAY 1)Background/Review:

• Review the meaning of improvisation, setting, conflict, and resolution• Review main idea, details, and adjectives

Procedure (Introduction, Modeling, Guided Practice, Independent Practice, Closure):

(Introduction)1. Review the meanings of the vocabulary being used.2. Have students stand in a circle with the fabric in the middle.3. Explain that using only the fabric they will develop characters. Emphasize that the

characters should be developed to the point that the audience can guess who they are based on appearance and mannerisms. They should not use language to identify their character.

(Modeling)1. Choose a piece of fabric and develop a character.2. Ask the students to guess the identity of the character.

(Guided Practice)1. Direct the students to select their fabric and begin developing a character.2. As the activity progresses make suggestions about refining the character or adding more

detail.(Independent Practice)

1. Continue the activity until the students appear ready to guess each other’s characters.2. Return to the circle and “perform” for each other. Have the students guess each other’s

characters.3. Give the students a setting and direct them to develop a conflict and resolution within

the setting for all the characters.4. Continue the improvisation until the “story” is complete.

(Closure)1. Explain that the next day they will write a collaborative creative story about the

characters, problem, and solution they developed.

Assessment:1. Observe students ability to develop well defined characters using only fabric.2. Observe students ability to create an improvisational scene in which the characters are

connected through a common setting, conflict and resolution.

• Vocabulary cards• LCD projector• ELMO camera

67

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

(DAY 2)Background/Review:

• Review the meaning of improvisation, setting, conflict, and resolution• Review main idea, details, and adjectives• Review the original characters that were developed the day before

Procedure (Introduction, Modeling, Guided Practice, Independent Practice, Closure):

(Introduction)1. Review the meanings of the vocabulary being used.2. Explain to the students they will write the story they created together the day before.3. Have students recreate the characters and the scene they created (using the fabric).

Allow them to “tweak” their work if they desire.(Modeling)

1. Project the “Story Map” on the white board and ask the students to return to their desks and work together to fill in the information based on the scene they created together.

2. Assist with proper placement of story elements where necessary.3. Instruct the students to transfer the information on the story map to paragraph form

(provide modeling and support when necessary).(Guided Practice)

• Have students take turns reading their original story with appropriate expression.(Independent Practice)

• Students read their story to each other in pairs.(Closure)

• For homework, students will illustrate scenes from their story to be displayed with the story.

Assessment:• Observe students’ ability to transfer the scene they created into a collaborative piece of

writing.

68

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

Figure 6. Domain Descriptors

Visual TheatreMovement

•Physical control •Appropriate use of space•Efficient movement•Use of stillness and stops •Timing and coordinated

movement•Communicates clearly and

precisely with body movements•Uses range of physical dynamics

and expressive movementsPhysical Expression

•Communicates clearly and precisely with body movements

• Uses range of physical dynamics and expressive movements

•Uses body to create characterVerbal Expression

•Wants to express self•Uses visual and auditory means of

verbal expression• Is understandable to others•Verbally communicates character

or moodCollaboration

•Works well with others•Respects and actively attends to

others•Accepts and uses the rules of an

activity•Shows concern for the group• Is aware of audience

Observation•Observes and recalls details of

models, peers, pictures, and scenes

•Asks questions and seeks information

•Can create from observations

MotivationCommitment

•Takes risks/shows courage•Perseveres at a task•Wants to improve

Focus•Maintains eye contact and

attention•Sustains concentration on the task•Gives and takes focus

appropriately with others•Can respond appropriately in the

momentReflection/Critique

•Takes and applies direction and criticism

•Provides meaningful, constructive feedback to others

•Recognizes superior performance by others

•Understands how choices affect outcomes

Creativity/CompositionProblem Solving

•Sees whole picture•Offers ideas•Understands sequence•Explores multiple solutions

Imagination•Engages in creative play•Believes in given context or

circumstances• Invents dramatic situations•Demonstrates ability to improvise

69

VISUAL THEATRE AND STUDENT SUCCESS

Figure 7. Visual Theatre Skills RubricVisual Theatre Skills Rubric for Students TheatreBridge Project

Date: _________________

Student: ________________ Grade: _____ Teacher/Aide: ___________

DOMAINS/SKILLS

STUDENT PERFORMANCE LEVELS

BEGINNING(1)

DEVELOPING (2)

PROFICIENT (3)

ADVANCED (4)

SCORE/COMMENTS

Visual TheatreMovement• Physical control

• Appropriate use of space

• Efficient move-ment

• Use of stillness and stops

• Timing and coordi-nated movement

Lacks control of body or parts of body which are focus of activity. May not move at all, or may use little movement or rock or sway. Movements may be uncontrolled, overly exaggerated, repetitive, or unnecessary. Lacks awareness of available space—bumps into objects and other students. Movements are awkward and run together.

Demonstrates some awareness of movement and space, but lacks adequate control. Attempts appropriate movements though performance is inconsistent. Uses more movement than needed. Movements are hesitant, choppy, or lack sharpness

Controls body movements with some inconsistency. Movements generally clear, deliberate, and appropriate to the activity. Demonstrates awareness of timing. Demonstrates awareness of own and others’ movements within available space. Uses stops between movements, but with some choppiness

Consistently controls body movements. Body is appropriately aligned and centered. Movement choices are deliberately, efficient, and clear. Adjust movements to available space. Timing is smooth. Uses breathe to coordinate own movements with those of others. Creates clean stops between movements with dynamic stillness.

Score:

70

Mastering the Curriculum: Students Framed as Experts

LINDA KRAKAUR

In 2004, a group of documentarians were tasked with filming the life of a teenaged

girl who had overcome tremendous obstacles during the Great Depression. These were no

ordinary documentarians. These experts were seventh grade Language Arts students, many

of whom had been identified with learning disabilities. Yet, through the dramatic frame

known as mantle of the expert (Heathcote & Bolton, 1995) these students were able to “live

through” and construct intensely meaningful episodes of learning in roles that they selected

and enacted. In the process, the socio-cultural dynamics of the mainstreamed classroom also

shifted as the fictional world provided students with disabilities the opportunity to demonstrate

their individual assets and become classroom leaders. Ultimately, drama in education served as

a means to applying the principles of Universal Design for Learning (CAST, 2011) in a rigorous

manner by creating authentic reasons for knowing, being, and doing. The impact of these

lessons “in” and “through” the dramatic world proved to have lasting effects both within and

beyond the classroom.

“Stop placing kids in the idiot box.” This evocative directive from the famed visual artist

with cerebral palsy, “King Gimp” (Dan Keplinger, 2010), to a group of teachers in Washington,

DC, is a cautionary tale expressing the frustrations of generations of students with special

needs who have been underestimated and over-classified. Shifting students with learning

disabilities from self-contained to inclusive classrooms, beginning in 1975, was an historic

step toward achieving equity for all learners. Yet these students may have had their academic

progress slowed by the introduction of high-stakes policy initiatives such as the No Child Left

Behind Act (2001). Greater attention to standardized test scores and the norming of student

objectives and expectations resulted in a narrowing of the curriculum and an emphasis on

test-taking skills for students. These shifts in priorities and pedagogy presents an approach to

teaching and learning that may not enable students with disabilities to perform in an optimal

way (Sternberg & Grigorenko, 2004) Standardization in schools has drawn attention to that

which is being tested rather than addressing the emotional, social, and individual needs of

students (Eisner, 2001). For too many students with learning disabilities, the stigma of having

71

STUDENTS FRAMED AS EXPERTS

“special needs” undermined student confidence, reduced engagement, and increased anxiety

regarding academic performance (Gerber, 2011; Pisha & Coyne, 2001). Research showed that

heightened attention to student performance on standardized tests could ultimately decrease

student motivation to participate and find meaning in curricula (Sternberg & Grigorenko, 2004).

In too many cases, the “normalizing” of objectives, assessments, and expectations for all

students in public schools has exacerbated the negative aspects of schooling for students with

learning disabilities (Cole, 2006). Standardization may lead teachers to a focus on how students

with disabilities differ from the established norms rather than on the unique assets that these

students bring into the learning community.

Despite the worthy intentions of federal policy makers who claimed that aggregating

the data for student subgroups would ultimately serve those who have “historically been

underserved” (Cawthon, 2007, p. 462), the effects reveal a more troubling scenario for students

with learning disabilities. The latest data published by the Department of Education (2001-

2011) in The National Transition Longitudinal Study-2 (NTLS-2) indicated that students with

disabilities who have been mainstreamed continue to perform far behind their classmates. This

comprehensive study of more than 11,000 secondary students receiving special education

services demonstrated that during the first decade of this millennium, students with disabilities

performed on average 3.4 years behind general education students in reading and 3.2

years behind in math. Additionally, this achievement gap increased as students with learning

disabilities progressed to higher grades. Unfortunately, neither a shift in educational setting

nor a shift in the measurements of students with learning disabilities has ensured greater

achievement. According to the NTLS-2 findings, more than half of students with learning

disabilities failed a general education academic course and were twice as likely to fail at least

one course in a general education setting as opposed to a special education setting (Newman,

Wagner, Huang, Shaver, Knokey, Contreras, Ferguson, Breene, Nagle, Cameto, 2011).

Returning students with learning disabilities to self-contained classrooms is not the

solution to this dilemma. Rather, policy makers, schools, and teachers need to recognize the

range of pedagogical challenges presented by students with learning disabilities, so teachers

72

STUDENTS FRAMED AS EXPERTS

can respond to them in a productive manner (Glass, Meyer, & Rose, 2013). Greater attention

needs to be place on the social, emotional, and cognitive needs of students with learning

disabilities (Abedin, 2010) rather than on test scores. O’Sullivan (2011) described the current

high-stakes educational paradigm as ineffective noting that it undermines the abilities of

students with exceptionalities by emphasizing particular types of intelligence over others.

Determinations of student success based on a single instrument (standardized tests) presents

an obstacle that students with learning differences may find defeating. Lack of attention

to holistic learning goals such as the development of critical thinking skills, collaborative

habits, and emotional resiliency is not only troubling, but could potentially undermine those

objectives established in Individualized Education Programs and further alienate students who

may already feel marginalized. Gerber (2011) noted “test-driven schools and classrooms just

frustrate students who learn differently and only draw attention to those learning differences”

(p. 4).

Recognizing the lack of progress for students with learning disabilities under NCLB,

the Obama administration (U.S. Department of Education, 2010) proposed the following two

modifications to educational policies pertaining to students with disabilities:

1. Assessments that more accurately and appropriately measure the performance of

students with disabilities

2. High-quality, state- and locally-determined curricula and instructional supports that

incorporate the principles of Universal Design for Learning to meet all students’ needs

These modifications to federal policy hold promise as they are more clearly aligned with

recent findings in neuroscience. Diverse ways of experiencing, developing, and representing

knowledge are essential for learning and should be accounted for in pedagogy and

assessments (Gardner, 1991).

Universal Design for Learning

Universal Design for Learning (UDL) is described as a research-based and robust

pedagogical framework grounded in an approach to curriculum development that provides

all students with the opportunity learn (CAST, 2011). UDL also guides educators to recognize

73

STUDENTS FRAMED AS EXPERTS

that difference is the norm, not the exception (Hall, Meyer, & Rose, 2012). In other words, the

diversity of learning needs should guide instruction rather than instruction being guided by

attempts to make all students the same. UDL has been defined as an effective and inclusive

pathway for teachers to maximize individual ways of knowing, doing, and being as it validates

multiple means of representation, action and expression, and engagement in every lesson

(Rose & Gravel, 2010). Educators who teach inclusive classes may experience greater success

as a result of these explicit guidelines as UDL provides an instructional framework for teachers

to decrease obstacles to student learning in order to build challenging and effective lessons

for all (Glass, et al., 2013). Additionally, the UDL framework balances the social, emotional, and

cognitive needs of the student through a holistic approach to instruction.

As more teachers adopt UDL strategies, the needs of diverse learners can be

increasingly identified and addressed. Barringer, Pohlman, & Robinson (2010) suggested

that such a shift in priorities will prove to be transformative for classroom practice ultimately

improving student achievement. Yet, such broad shifts in pedagogy require intensive training.

Although teachers are being introduced to UDL in greater numbers, many still struggle to

implement this framework into their teaching practice. This paper presents one method that

teachers can use to authentically and seamlessly integrate UDL into their pedagogy.

Arts Education

Fowler (1996) described the arts as a “significant way for students to discern,

express, communicate, figure out, and understand the human universe” (p. 4) as

they are intrinsic to the way humans make sense of the world (Bamford, 2009). As the

three principles of UDL (multiple means of representation, action and expression, and

engagement) are embedded in arts experiences, teachers who utilize the arts in their

teaching create conditions in which all learners benefit. Furthermore, teaching students

“in” the arts (focusing on arts elements and principles) and “through” the arts (shaping

understanding in non-arts content) provides an authentic pathway to implementing UDL

as arts experiences are accessible to the diverse ways (linguistic, cultural, and cognitive)

that students gain understanding (Hall, et al., 2012).

74

STUDENTS FRAMED AS EXPERTS

Just as the Obama administration has recognized the value of UDL, so has it

acknowledged the benefits of arts education for diverse learners. According to the

President’s Committee on the Arts and Humanities (2011) “arts integration models,

the practice of teaching across classroom subjects in tandem with the arts, have

been yielding some particularly promising results in school reform and closing the

achievement gap” (p. vi). The arts provide an impetus for innovation by “providing

teachers with more effective classroom strategies, engaging students in learning,

and creating a climate of high performance in schools” (p. vi). When arts integration

is implemented within the framework of UDL, not only are two of the Obama

administrations’ goals addressed, so are the dynamic needs of students with disabilities.

As Glass, Meyers, and Rose (2013) suggested, “just as UDL can provide a

structured means for understanding human variability, the arts can enhance our ability

to respond to variability” (p. 107). Teachers who work with students with learning

disabilities need powerful methods to address student needs. Arts integration

provides a robust pathway to curriculum design that teachers can employ to effectively

differentiate instruction.

Drama in Education

Drama in education is an arts-based approach to teaching and learning that

integrates pedagogical best practices with the principles of UDL. Clipson-Boyes

(1998) described drama in education as an exploration and communication of ideas,

issues, subject matter, themes, stories, and feelings through participatory action

and imagination. More specifically, teachers who utilize drama in education employ

dramatic elements such as focus, tension, role, imagination, symbol, and space to

engage students and to achieve educational objectives (both arts and non-arts related).

Bowell and Heap (2013) explained that drama is a social process in which students

develop a spectrum of growth (social, emotional, cultural, creative, and cognitive).

Additionally, drama in education provides a medium for students to demonstrate shifts

in perception and deepened understanding. For students with learning disabilities,

drama in education provides a dynamic alternative to traditional classroom practices

75

STUDENTS FRAMED AS EXPERTS

as the learning occurs through an “as if” world where experimentation is encouraged,

language and texts are expressed in multiple ways, and students select a variety of

roles, allowing them to become empowered makers of meaning (Goodley & Runswick-

Cole, 2011). Furthermore, no prior acting or performance experiences in drama are

required as students rely on their unique resources and personal experiences to

manifest authentic acts of learning.

Using Process Drama to Engage Students in Robust Acts of Meaning

In 2004, I conducted a research study to complete my Master’s dissertation.

The intention of the study was to develop and assess an arts integrated approach to

teaching reading and writing with a group of students in an inclusive classroom. The

objective was to determine how drama in education would impact a broad spectrum

of domains (emotional, social, and cognitive) and support the academic growth of

students with diverse learning needs. To determine the effectiveness of the intervention,

I used a mixed-methods approach, including interviews with students, parents,

teachers, and other school staff, as well as observations, and an analysis of artifacts.

Student scores (pre and post-test) were collected from a reading attitude survey and

standardized tests. This paper identifies and describes the practices that were found to

have a significant impact on the academic, social, and emotional needs of students with

learning disabilities.

Context for the Project

Participants in this study were members of a seventh grade Language Arts

general education class in a suburb outside of Washington, DC. Ten students with

learning disabilities represented over half of the classroom population. The class was

co-taught by a general education and special education teacher. I developed four

case studies of students with learning disabilities who differed in gender, ethnicity,

and learning needs. These four students served as the primary focus of the research;

however, the breadth of the findings suggested that other students had also been

significantly impacted by the intervention. Therefore, relevant data for all students were

76

STUDENTS FRAMED AS EXPERTS

included as evidence in the final report. Drama in education was integrated into the

curriculum over the course of three months, two days a week for ninety-minute blocks.

The pretext for these lessons was a novel, Out of the Dust, by Karen Hesse (1999),

which was required reading for all students in the class. Both teachers participated in

the study. The general education classroom teacher served mainly as an observer while

the special educator participated in the drama and worked with students intermittently.

I used a technique called “mantle of the expert” (Heathcote & Bolton, 1995)

to frame the dramatic work. The students accepted roles as expert documentarians

tasked with investigating the life of a teenaged girl (Billy Jo) who lived in the Dust

Bowl. I enacted differing roles such as teacher and researcher (outside of the drama),

and facilitator and characters (inside of the drama) to facilitate this project. Signals and

explanations were always communicated clearly, so students would be comfortable

and develop trust in the process. Students enacted varied roles that supported them in

understanding the characters and conflicts embedded in the novel. They also selected

expert roles (ie. actors, choreographers, costume designers, script writers) to create a

coming attraction of the documentary they had been tasked with creating.

At the conclusion of this project, findings revealed academic, social, and

emotional growth for the four case study students as well as many of their peers - both

students identified with and without disabilities. In particular, notable gains were made

by students with learning disabilities who had previously struggled with academic

achievement and feelings of insecurity. Parents and students were provided with written

copies of the results after the conclusion of the study.

Process Drama and Out of the Dust

The experiences of students participating in the project are grounded in the

work of two drama in education pioneers. These methods are more commonly known

as “process drama” (O’Neill, 1995) and “mantle of the expert” (Heathcote & Bolton,

1995). O’Neill (1995) described process drama as the strategic exploration of a pretext

such as a story, newspaper article, photograph, etc. through a series of dramatic

episodes “that are part of a web of meaning.”

77

STUDENTS FRAMED AS EXPERTS

The pretext for the project was a novel selected by the classroom teacher. Out

of the Dust, (Hesse, 1999) depicts the life (historical fiction) of a teenaged girl (Billie Jo)

and her struggles to overcome difficult family and environmental conditions during the

Great Depression. This novel presented several challenges for students as the story was

written through a series of narrative poems, was situated in an unfamiliar and historical

setting, and described lived experiences that were quite foreign to the students in

the class. To address these potential barriers, process drama was selected as the

intervention of choice because it provides opportunities for the teacher and students

to slow down time, assume multiple roles and perspectives, and increase attention

to details and dilemmas. Mantle of the expert was implemented as a framing device

applied to the dramatic context whereby students entered the fictional world as experts

tasked with producing a documentary based on the life of a young girl they had never

met. Entering the dramatic world through the role of competent “professionals” was

utilized as an asset-based approach to situating students as capable members of the

learning community regardless of their prior experiences in Language Arts. Ultimately,

through inquiry based investigations and improvised enactments of critical moments in

the novel, major shifts for participants in both the fictional world and in their own lives

were noted. The following describes how drama in education implemented within a

UDL framework is an effective pedagogical approach to meeting the needs of diverse

learners.

Multiple Means of Representation

This first principle of UDL provides guidelines for teachers to develop resourceful,

knowledgeable learners (CAST, 2011) by providing options for how students perceive

information, construct and embody text and language, and access prior knowledge and

essential understandings. Whereas traditional teaching approaches in Language Arts classes

frequently privilege written texts as the source for learning, drama in education uses a variety

of aesthetic representations (props, body language, facial expressions, etc.) to prompt

students to “imagine possibilities, explore roles, rehearse and revise oral language, and use

78

STUDENTS FRAMED AS EXPERTS

the experiences to expand interpretations of texts” (Crumpler, 2006, p. 1). For example, on

the first day of the project, students examined an old suitcase filled with objects that were

described as belonging to Billie Joe. Relying only on their curiosity, inference skills, and prior

knowledge, the students were assigned small groups and tasked with “reading” the objects.

This included picking them up, describing them on paper using concrete, sensory details, and

finally conjecturing on who owned them, where she was going, and why these particular items

were taken on the trip. All groups created plausible scenarios based on evidence and context

clues. Several groups were surprisingly accurate in their scenarios, so much so that I had to rely

on another dramatic element (surprise), to not reveal the entire mystery on the first day and

undermine interest in the novel.

Nate, a student with an IEP who found reading particularly challenging, wrote in his

journal on the first day: “Today I learned how to put things together like taking “a” and

“b” and put them together. I was having fun and only thinking about what we were doing.

Is it going to be like this the whole time?” His enthusiasm and that of his peers, based on

successful interrogation of objects (texts), was intensified when I handed out a fictional letter

addressed to the class from Ms. Bosley, the “director” of the American Film Board. The

letter stated that she was looking for a highly inquisitive and creative group of middle school

students to create a documentary about the life of a troubled teenager who had run away from

home. Students quickly connected their investigation of the suitcase with this request for their

services and unanimously agreed to go assume the role of filmmakers.

The next day, I again explained that students would be entering a fictional world where

they (and I) would have multiple roles. When I handed out the novel as a ‘diary’ revealing the

secret thoughts of the owner of the luggage, the repurposing of the text proved engaging

for even the most reluctant readers. Even those who had earlier expressed doubts about the

relevance of reading, quickly began flipping through the pages. A shift in Daniel’s attitude

toward reading was noticeable in a letter he wrote after being told that funding might become

an obstacle to the completion of the documentary.

79

STUDENTS FRAMED AS EXPERTS

Dear Ms. Bosley,

Ever since Ms. Kay [Ms. Krakaur] came we started reading this terrific book

called Out of the dust. It is a very important book. I am learning a lot.

Please try to get some money. I don’t care if you have to steal please ev-

erybody likes the project. I can assure you that L.J. is a trustworthy & good

Donation. Imagine you giving us money, you will be very popular, To this

school. I even am loving this book. And I hate reading.

Gallas (2003) stated that literacy entails an ability to construct and manipulate a variety

of texts. She pointed to imagination as a key to unlocking text. As demonstrated in these

vignettes, students with learning disabilities have plenty of imagination; what they often

lack is access to content knowledge through meaningful and varied forms.

Multiple Means of Action and Expression

This second principle of UDL provides guidelines for teachers to support students

in becoming strategic, goal-directed learners (CAST, 2011). Teachers are encouraged to

employ active learning strategies, vary modes for students to express and communicate,

and provide options for student goal-setting and progress monitoring.

In their roles as expert filmmakers, students consistently strategized how to

interpret key moments depicted in the novel. They achieved their goals by taking on a

variety of roles to portray and experience critical moments in the lives of the characters.

Afterward, the students reflected and made meaning of these enactments in their roles

as directors, scriptwriters, prop designers, etc.

One poignant moment both in the fictional world of the novel and in the real

world context of the classroom occurred when students were asked to create a scene

at the cemetery after Billie Jo lost her pregnant mother to an accidental house fire.

(Although this scene at the cemetery was not part of the novel, process drama allows

for both teachers and students to become writers of episodes of significance that can

be explored for meaning, intention, and consequence). Jay, a bright student with a

learning disability who was often teased by his peers for repeating seventh grade,

80

STUDENTS FRAMED AS EXPERTS

volunteered to take on the role of Pa. As Jay kneeled down to create a tableaux (still-

image) of how he envisioned this moment, he grasped an apple – an appropriate

symbol of the abundance of life that had been absent from Billie Jo’s childhood in the

Dust Bowl. Through this medium, Jay exhibited the insights and understandings that he

had struggled to demonstrate through traditional teaching practices. Jay’s use of body

language, facial expression, and symbolism communicated a depth of comprehension

that had remained dormant in much of his prior schooling. When asked to complete

a writing prompt of the five wishes Pa would have expressed at that moment, Jay

responded:

1. I remember to put the carosine away

2. I was dead

3. My wife was still hear

4. This had never happen

5. It was me instead of her

Gardner (1991) stated that “an important symptom of an emerging understanding is the

capacity to represent a problem in a number of different ways” (p. 9). Jay had demonstrated

his understanding of the father’s inner conflict both physically and in writing. Through drama

in education, Jay selected how he wanted to interpret the significance of the moment and

demonstrated a level of motivation that would lead to future gains in comprehension and

confidence. Furthermore, Jay’s role in the fictional world resulted in acknowledgment of his

assets in the real world as the chiding of his peers dissipated. After the drama, Jay’s teacher

commented, “He’s been very positive in class ever since. It’s made a major improvement: this

might be the turning point in his life.”

Multiple Means of Engagement

Glass, et al. (2013) described this principle of UDL as one of the greatest

challenges for teachers to implement as the levels of engagement of students vary

widely, and many students, particularly in secondary schools, become disillusioned.

Students with learning disabilities are particularly prone to feeling marginalized as they

81

STUDENTS FRAMED AS EXPERTS

progress through school, as greater attention is paid to their test scores and academic

performance than their diverse learning needs.

Although this third principle of UDL may prove challenging, it is essential to learning as

purposeful, persistent and motivated students are more apt to overcome barriers. Teachers are

encouraged to optimize student choice, autonomy, and authenticity. Developing collaborative

habits and self- awareness are also central features of this principle.

Saxton and Miller (2006) described drama in education as an experiential and

social means of making sense of the world. The social demands of working in drama

and dramatic situations enacted in a drama heighten student engagement. Unlike the

high-stakes pressures that may hinder students and reinforce feelings of failure, drama

stimulates emotional investment and personal connection to the subject matter. Nate’s

initial excitement for the drama work increased over the remainder of the project as he

was one of the first students to complete the book. Nate’s mother commented, “That’s

all Nate would talk about. The problem wasn’t getting him to read; it was getting him

to stop reading, so he could go to sleep.” Daniel, who had demonstrated oppositional

behaviors before the project, not only finished the book at home during his spare time,

but he also initiated a visit to the school library to read another book by the same

author. On Awards Night, Daniel walked two miles back to school by himself, so he

could be recognized for his achievements. Drama in education had indeed provided the

means through which these reluctant readers transformed into purposeful, motivated

learners who could overcome their learning challenges.

Drama in education also provided authentic learning opportunities. For

example, Theresa, an adopted student from Russia, had been positioned on the social

margins of the community. Although Theresa was quite bright, her delayed speech

and unusual manner of dress led to her being ostracized. Yet, at the end of the project,

when Theresa’s group collaborated to plan a “coming attraction” for their documentary,

she asserted her desire to take on several roles including costume organizer, lead

actor, and piano player. While other groups relied on digital music, Theresa offered to

82

STUDENTS FRAMED AS EXPERTS

write an original composition and play it on the piano for her group. Whereas Theresa

had previously appeared awkward and shy, drama in education allowed her to utilize

her assets, skills, and talents. Each success propelled her confidence to reject her

marginalized status. Theresa’s mother reported feeling elated that Theresa had initiated

a leadership role in her group. Theresa told her mother, “Hey, this is right up my alley

because this is something I really want to do.” At the end of the project, students filmed

their coming attractions to be premiered at the school’s Awards Night. As Theresa

displayed her prowess at the piano her unassuming smile finally made an appearance.

For Theresa and many of her classmates with learning disabilities, this performance

provided an opportunity for “difference” to become an asset, and their peers and

teachers applauded these efforts.

Conclusion

Removing the walls separating students with learning disabilities from

general education classes has not eliminated the barriers to learning. Rather, in many

inclusion classes, the obstacles created by “high-stakes” accountability measures

further marginalize those who differ from typically developing students (Cole, 2006).

This project demonstrated that Universal Design for Learning provides a manageable

framework to assist teachers in identifying and addressing the unique abilities and

challenges of every student in the classroom. As demonstrated in the experiences

of the students who participated in this project, implementation of UDL can lead to

tremendous gains when teachers create a classroom centered on acts of meaning

making and students taking ownership for their learning. The Obama administration has

acknowledged the value of both UDL and the arts; yet, it takes more than an affirmation

for these approaches to be enacted in classrooms. Drama in education provides one

method to free students from the “idiot box” into what O’Neill (1995) described as “a

sustained, intensive, and profoundly satisfying encounter” in the dramatic world. These

benefits may carry over into the real world, too.

As this study showed, when students are provided with the opportunity to

experience knowing, doing, and being in diverse ways in and through the arts, they can

83

STUDENTS FRAMED AS EXPERTS

make important gains emotionally, socially, and academically. Marcus was one student

who had demonstrated improved reading comprehension and heightened engagement

during this project; yet, teachers had later decided to move him into a self-contained

classroom. “I liked the way it was before,” Marcus said when I interviewed him months

after the project had ended. “It was the best class ever.”

Goodley and Runswick-Cole (2011) stated that “the importance of imagination

and vision is often lost in the context of a scrutinized, quantified, and marketized

education system” (p. 87). Drama in education and UDL present a rigorous two-

pronged approach to empowerment for every child, particularly those with diverse

learning needs. Change begins with teachers who insert imagination into classroom

practice and shift the focus from standardized assessments for students with learning

disabilities to the development of lessons that provide multiple pathways for students

to demonstrate what they know and can do. As this study shows, students can

demonstrate profound insights into literature, the world, and themselves when the arts

are integrated in the curriculum with intention and purpose.

References

Abedin, G. Exploring the potential of art-based education for adolescents with learning

disabilities: A case study of engagement in learning through the arts. Ph.D. dissertation,

University of Maryland, College Park. Retrieved November 26, 2011, from Dissertations

& Theses: Full Text. (Publication No. AAT 3409864).

Bamford, A. (2009). The wow factor: Global research compendium on the impact of the arts in

education. Berlin, DE: Waxmann.

Barringer, M. D., Pohlman, C. & Robinson, M. (2010). Schools for all kinds of minds: Boosting

student success by embracing learning variation. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.

Bowell, P. & Heap, B. S. (2013). Planning process drama: Enriching teaching and learning.

London, UK: Routledge.

84

STUDENTS FRAMED AS EXPERTS

CAST. (2011). Universal Design for Learning guidelines version 2.0. Retrieved from

http://www.udlcenter.org/aboutudl/udlguidelines

Cawthon, S. (2007). Hidden benefits and unintended consequences of No Child Left Behind

policies for students who are deaf or hard of hearing. American Educational Research

Journal, 44(3), 460-492.

Clipson-Boyles, S. (1998). Drama in Primary English Teaching. London, UK: David Fulton.

Cole, C. (2006). Closing the achievement gap series part III: What is the impact of NCLB on

the inclusion of students with disabilities? Retrieved from http://www.ceep.indiana.edu/

projects/PDF/PB_V4N11_Fall_2006_NCLB_dis.pdf

Crumpler, T. (2006). Educational drama as response to literature: Possibilities for young

learners. In J.J. Schneider, T.P. Crumpler, & T. Rogers (Eds.), Process drama and multiple

literacies: Addressing social, cultural, and ethical issues, (pp. 1-14). Portsmouth, NH:

Heinemann.

Eisner, E. (2001). What does it mean to say a school is doing well? The Phi Delta Kappan, 82(5),

367-372.

Fowler, C. (1996). Strong arts, strong schools: The promising potential and shortsighted

disregard of the arts in American schooling. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.

Gallas, K. (2003). Imagination and literacy: A teacher’s search for the heart of learning. New

York: Teachers College Press.

Gardner, H. (1991). The unschooled mind: How children think and how schools should teach.

New York, NY: Basic Books.

Gerber, B. (2011). Art education and special education: A promising partnership.

[Presentation]. National Arts Education Association Lowenfeld Lecture.

Glass, D., Meyer, A., & Rose, D. H. (2013). Universal Design for Learning and the arts. Harvard

Educational Review, 83(1), 98-119.

Goodley, D. & Runswick-Cole, K. (2011). Something in the air? Creativity, culture and

community. Research in Drama Education, 16(1), 75-91.

Heathcote, D., & Bolton, G. (1995). Drama for learning Dorothy Heathcote’s mantle of the

expert approach to education. Portsmouth, NH: Heinemann.

85

STUDENTS FRAMED AS EXPERTS

Hall, T. E., Meyer, A., & Rose, D. H.(Eds.). (2012) Universal Design for Learning in the classroom:

Practical applications. New York, NY: Guilford Press.

Hesse, K. (1999). Out of the dust. New York, NY: Scholastic.

Keplinger, D. (2010, November 3). Course guest lecture at the American University, Washington,

DC.

No Child Left Behind (NCLB) Act of 2001, Pub. L. No. 107-110, § 115, Stat. 1425 (2002).

Newman, L., Wagner, M., Huang, T., Shaver, D., Knokey, A. M., Yu, J., Contreras, E., Ferguson,

K., Greene, S., Nagle, K., & Cameto, R. (2011). Secondary school programs and

performance of students with disabilities. A special topic report of findings from the

National Longitudinal Transition Study-2 (NLTS2) (NCSER 2012-3000). U.S. Department

of Education. Washington, DC: National Center for Special Education Research. Menlo

Park, CA: SRI International. Retrieved from www.nlts2.org/reports/2011_11/nlts2_

report_2011_11_complete.pdf.

O’Neill, C. (1995). Drama Worlds. Portsmouth, NH: Heinemann.

O’Sullivan, C. (2011, March 10). Lecture on using drama to develop emotional intelligence in

children and young people with Asperger’s syndrome. Dublin, Ireland: Trinity College,

Pisha, B., & Coyne, P. (2001). Smart from the start: The promise of universal design for learning.

Remedial and Special Education, 22(4), 197-203.

President’s Committee on the Arts and Humanities. (2011). Reinvesting in arts education:

Winning America’s future through creative schools. Washington, DC. Retrieved from http://

www.pcah.gov

Rose, D. H., & Gravel, J. W. (2010). Universal design for learning. In B. McGaw, P. Peterson, &

E. Baker (Eds.). International Encyclopedia of Education (3rd Ed.). Oxford: Elsevier.

Saxton, J. & Miller, C. Story drama structures: Building supports for multiple literacies. In J.J.

Schneider, T.P. Crumpler, & T. Rogers (Eds.), Process drama and multiple literacies:Addressing

social, cultural, and ethical issues, (pp. 15-33). Portsmouth, NH: Heinemann.

Sternberg, R. J., & Grigorenko, E. L. (2004). Successful intelligence in the classroom. Theory

into Practice, 43(4), 274–280.

86

STUDENTS FRAMED AS EXPERTS

U.S. Department of Education (2001-2011). National Transition Longitudinal Study-2. Retrieved

from http://www.nlts2.org/faq.html#whatisit

U.S. Department of Education (2010). A blueprint for reform: The reauthorization of the

Elementary and Secondary Education Act. Retrieved from http://www2.ed.gov/policy/

elsec/leg/blueprint/blueprint.pdf

87

Emotional Intelligence Through Art: Strategies for Children with Emotional Behavioral Disturbances

SOPHIE LUCIDO JOHNSON

Students in New Orleans public school systems, facing high levels of Post Traumatic

Stress Disorder (PTSD), are more likely than the national average to have a disability (Brault,

2011; Maggi, 2012). Arts-integrated social emotional interventions for students with behavioral

differences and Emotional Behavioral Disorders (EBD), as demonstrated in a New Orleans

project I developed called Emotional Intelligence Through Art (EITA), is a preventative,

effective way to help students who have behavioral differences minimize destructive behavior

and assimilate into general education settings. The interventions were simple, deliberate

strategies such as ample time for student work and exploration, small group instruction,

celebration of engagement as success, minimization of teacher talk, explicit vocabulary

building around emotional language, and role-playing. Since 2010, four charter schools in

New Orleans have participated in the Emotional Intelligence Through Art (EITA) program to

teach arts-integrated emotional literacy in small group settings. The early results of EITA show

that given targeted instruction, students with EBD–particularly those affected by PTSD–can

significantly decrease violent behavior at school.

I organize the paper into three sections. First, I discuss the relationship between PTSD

and EBD, and the rising need for functional interventions. Next, I discuss strategies for using

the arts to explicitly teach social emotional objectives. In the final section of this paper, I

present the outcomes of EITA, which demonstrate that targeted, arts-integrated interventions

can significantly reduce the number of behavioral referrals for the growing number of students

with symptoms of EBD.

Relationship between Post Traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD)

and Emotional Behavioral Disorders (EBD)

In August 2005, the people of New Orleans experienced a major trauma that would

impact their lives forever. Hurricane Katrina damaged every major road and building in the city,

breached the levees causing massive citywide flooding, and killed more than 1,400 people.

88

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE THROUGH ART

Roughly 33% of the survivors of Hurricane Katrina suffered symptoms of PTSD (Babbel, 2011).

A study conducted by The Institute of Women and Ethnic Studies in 2012 found that at least

a third of all children in New Orleans showed symptoms of depression and PTSD (Maggi,

2012). PTSD is just one type of emotional disorder that can exist for children in public schools.

Emotional disorders like PTSD fall under the special education category of EBD, a broad

identification of more specific difficulties of children and adolescents, such as Oppositional

Defiance Disorder (ODD), Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder (OCD), and Attention Deficit/

Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) (Pacer Center, 2006). In the United States, 6.7% of all students

who are served under the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (IDEA) are identified as

having EBD (National Center for Education Statistics, 2008; Wagner, Kutash, Duchnowksi, &

Epstein, 2005).

Case Study of a Student With PTSD

Eva1, who was five years old, had been removed from three general education

classrooms by the fourth week of the school year. She had attempted to choke one teacher

with his own necktie, bitten a police officer, and pinched several students repeatedly without

provocation. At school, she refused to speak with most adults. She sat in the corner and

ripped up pieces of paper during class periods. Sometimes she grew angry for no identifiable

reason, and she threw chairs, desks, or pairs of scissors. Teachers struggled to find a trigger

for Eva’s outbursts–that is, a consistent antecedent for her troubled behaviors (Sexual Assault

Center, 2008).

Eva eventually revealed to the school psychologist that she had witnessed her father

shoot a family friend while she was in his car with him, and she had seen the victim die. She

had also witnessed a suicide, and had experienced physical abuse. Eva’s behaviors, which

included withdrawal from school, hyperactivity, opposition to authority, and violent outbursts,

are characteristic of a child with EBD. Her experiences suggest that her emotional differences

are a result of some degree of PTSD and situational depression.

Eva’s teachers tried several behavioral intervention plans (BIPs), but with no real results.

Eva spoke with the school psychologist once a week, but continued to act out in ways that

1 Name has been changed.

89

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE THROUGH ART

were generally considered detrimental to herself, and to others. Eventually, to keep Eva from

being expelled from the school, her teachers and family members recommended evaluation

for special education services. The special education evaluation confirmed the beliefs of those

closest to Eva: she was identified as having EBD. However, the identification did not lessen the

degree and magnitude of Eva’s behavioral outbursts.

When Eva started second grade, she was enrolled in a once-weekly group activity for

students with characteristics of EBD developed to target emotional intelligence through visual

arts. It was a good fit for Eva as the only projects she ever completed were visual art projects,

and she seemed uncharacteristically enthusiastic around new art supplies. In the small group

of eight students, Eva spent an hour a week completing assignments in which she was asked

to depict her emotions in abstract shapes and splashes of color using oil pastels, acrylic paints,

and clay. Simultaneously, the group had started to incorporate role-playing into its lessons and

Eva and her peers practiced explaining their hypothetical emotions in a variety of situations.

For example, in one scenario presented to the group, students explained what they would feel

if not selected first to be on a team. The goal was for the students in the group to eventually be

able to identify their stressful emotions and communicate verbally those emotions to a teacher

before acting impulsively. Four weeks after the first session, Eva told her homeroom teacher, “I

am feeling frustrated, and I need some space to draw.” Eva’s teacher was speechless. Eva had

never articulated her emotions before, and this time, although she was frustrated, the violent

outburst never came.

By the end of the school year, Eva’s behavior referrals per month had decreased from

22 to zero. Beginning in February of 2011, Eva experienced three months without a behavior

referral. She was slowly able to re-integrate into the general education setting for more hours

of each day. She also enrolled in Saturday art classes, where she began to build technical

skills as an artist. Art offered Eva a gateway to feeling successful, and gave her an opportunity

to acknowledge and describe her feelings. The engagement that art offered, coupled with

appropriate class size and content that Eva genuinely lacked, helped Eva assimilate into the

general education setting as a successful, bright, creative student.

90

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE THROUGH ART

Interventions for Students With EBD

Eva’s case provides one example of how a community disaster can lead to events

contributing to the emotional instability of a young child. Her behaviors and subsequent

diagnosis of EBD were typical of many PTSD cases identified after Hurricane Katrina (Langley,

Kataoka, Stein, & Stein, 2012). According to the National Association of School Psychologists

(Davis, Culotta, Levine & Rice, 2011), the supported definition of EBD is:

A condition in which behavioral or emotional responses of an individual in

school are so different from his/her generally accepted, age appropriate,

ethnic or cultural norms that they adversely affect performance in such areas

as self care, social relationships, personal adjustment, academic progress,

classroom behavior, or work adjustment. (p. 46)

EBD is identified most often in students who engage in oppositional and defiant behavior–

such as refusing to do work, talking back to authority figures, and acting violently in nonviolent

situations (Langley, et al., 2012). In the long term, students who have characteristics of EBD

but do not receive formal social and emotional intervention pay a toll: more students with

emotional differences drop out of school than graduate with diplomas (National Center for

Education Statistics, 2008; Wagner, et al., 2005). Ultimately, failure to provide accommodations

and modifications for students with EBD drastically affects not only students with behavioral

differences, but also their peers. Since EBD often manifests in displays of disruptive and violent

behaviors, the entire classroom community changes when the needs of a student with EBD are

not met (Barber, 2003).

Most interventions suggested since the passing of the Individuals with Disabilities

Education Act (IDEA) in 2004 relied on individualized behavioral intervention plans (BIPs),

which are usually driven by external rewards (US Department of Education, 2006). These

plans are developed from Functional Behavioral Assessments (FBAs), and they are important

components of working with children who have been identified as having EBD. However,

preventative and ongoing instruction targeting social emotional learning is also important for

all students who display emotional differences. The Collaborative for Academic, Social, and

Emotional Learning identifies dozens of school-wide preventative social emotional curricula

91

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE THROUGH ART

available for all grade levels (Casel, 2013). Still, schools do not acceptably provide interventions

for students with EBD. In 2009, an estimated 6 to 10 percent of school-aged students had some

kind of emotional or behavioral disorder, but only one percent received formal special education

services or interventions (Kauffman & Landrum, 2009).

Using Art to Teach Social Emotional Learning

Researchers generally agree that there are five main elements of social and emotional

learning: self-awareness, self-management, social awareness, relationship skills, and responsible

decision-making (Durlak, Weissberg, Dymnicki, Taylor & Schellinger, 2011). Social emotional curricula

encourage teachers to build classroom objectives around these competencies, and to teach them

like they would teach math, reading, and writing.

Unfortunately, many of these curricula depend on language skills, such as talking, role-

playing, or writing, to benefit from the main ideas and objectives the curricula intend to address.

For students who have experienced significant trauma, or who exhibit characteristics of EBD,

language skills are not always readily accessible. Talking or writing about social and emotional

concepts can cause students with emotional differences to feel frustrated and, thus, never access

the content.

Art offers a gateway for students with emotional differences because it necessarily engages

experiential learning opportunities, and allows students to access content without initially using

spoken or written language. Students who have experienced trauma in their lives are often not

used to feeling successful at school. They are often mis-diagnosed as having Attention Deficit

Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD), and are given medication that can diminish their participation

even more (Henion & Elder, 2010). When students who have not experienced much success

at school encounter art education for the first time, in which success can feel immediate and

accessible, they often find themselves newly invested in school (Arlington, 2009).

To capitalize on engagement that accompanies creativity, teachers can integrate

social emotional objectives into art lessons. The content, then, becomes the social emotional

competencies that students with EBD need to learn; and students, teachers, and parents become

invested in success because of the engagement and experiential nature of the learning.

92

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE THROUGH ART

Emotional Intelligence Through Art (EITA):

A Targeted Program for Students With EBD

Eva’s success was due in large part to a program in which she spent 60 minutes once a

week in a small group designed to explicitly integrate art with social emotional learning. This

program has been implemented for the past three years in two schools in New Orleans, both

as a weekly small group intervention of eight to ten children ages five to ten, and as a whole

class lesson with a co-teacher for groups of 30 fourth graders. The program was developed in

partnership with KidSmart, an organization in New Orleans that works towards linking the arts

with academic core curriculum in public schools (“Kidsmart: What we do,” 2012). The creation of

EITA involved getting feedback and input from two community members, two parent advocates,

a child psychologist, and ten classroom teachers.

Elements of EITA

Working in small groups for 60 minutes once a week, students can take small, logical

steps towards ownership of their social emotional learning. Each session of EITA encourages

students to work toward three major yearlong objectives:

•Expressing oneself in words and art

•Working as an ensemble

•Recognizing one’s own work as unique and special

Students know they are working on these objectives from the beginning of the program, so

that every time they demonstrate healthy social emotional habits during a session, the teacher

can point to which objective they are exhibiting.

For many students, just engaging in a lesson for 60 minutes is an enormous feat.

Early lessons, therefore, are simple and highly experiential, with very little teacher talk, and

an emphasis on small triumphs. For example, a student who shares a pair of scissors, or says

“please” before grabbing a sheet of paper, should be recognized and celebrated in front of

the group. The first major goal of group sessions is for all students to be at least somewhat

engaged or participatory in the lesson.

93

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE THROUGH ART

Each session is broken into four parts:

• A circle or check-in ritual, where students acknowledge themselves and each other as

part of a larger ensemble. This section usually includes a non-mandatory group warm-

up game that engages the group as a singular unit and encourages students to work

together.

• Introduction to art concepts and materials. Materials are unveiled and students pass

them around, ensuring that senses are engaged. The teacher does little; students

suggest how materials should be used safely and respectfully, sometimes in pairs, and

sometimes as a whole group. The teacher talks about a simple art concept, such as

varying shapes to create texture, that can be covered in five minutes or so, to diminish

teacher talk.

• A visual art or theatre project. Unlike many classes taught in a traditional school

setting, the student-driven artistic creation portion takes up 80 percent of the class

time. Students are encouraged to explore and self-discover. They investigate materials

and techniques on their own, without being reprimanded for being wrong or not

understanding an artistic practice.

• A presentation of work completed. This can be done in pairs or as a circle, depending

on the ability level of the group. At first, pairs are used frequently to cut down on

listening time. Eventually, students learn to patiently listen more, and full group

presentations become more common.

Sections of the sessions can be segmented, shortened, or revised at a teacher’s discretion,

although spending at least a full hour engaged in experiential learning can be deeply

rewarding and therapeutic to students who struggle to participate in the general education

setting.

EITA Units

EITA is offered in four five-week units to be taught throughout the year. Each unit

seeks to answer one essential question that guides the lessons, although the three major

yearlong objectives are addressed throughout the year. The order of the units is intentional:

each subsequent objective relies on prerequisite foundational skills taught in previous units.

94

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE THROUGH ART

Although social emotional learning is a continuum, with all skills constantly and simultaneously

in practice, many skills depend on others. Just as a student must have phonological awareness

to read sentences fluently, she must possess self-awareness in order to successfully build

complex and loving relationships with others.

Units are built around multi-week projects, which take the duration of the unit to

complete. With five weeks to complete a project students can develop many integral social and

emotional skills. Students have to be willing to show patience and perseverance, and they must

maintain investment in just one project over the course of extended periods of time. Because

students are working on projects that are self-initiated and self-focused, they remain invested

to complete the projects. Within this framework, students learn how different artistic elements

can contribute to a larger, more complex completed work. For example, an early project is to

create small collage works with multiple media (paper, cloth, cardboard) that symbolize parts of

the human body. By the end of the project, students combine all of the small collages to create

a much larger collage, which demonstrates how the strategies artists use in collage-making can

be combined and synthesized to create larger works with composite textures and patterns.

Unit One: Who am I? The theme of the first unit is on self-awareness and recognition

of one’s unique differences. Students spend the entire unit learning about the elements of

collage, using increasingly complex materials and techniques (such as scrunching, tearing, and

scaling). The unit project is a full-scale self-portrait, complete with head, body, and “heart ob-

ject,” created entirely from collage materials. The theme encourages students to begin to feel

proud of their work through presentation. Students become accustomed to showing their work

to the group and accepting compliments from teachers and peers (no constructive criticism

is used, instead, the emphasis is on seeing the positive in every work). By the end of the unit,

students are making positive comments about their own work, citing elements of their art that

make them feel proud.

Unit Two: How do I feel? Psychologists Mayer and Salovey (1993, 1997) initially

proposed that the primary characteristic of people with high emotional intelligence was their

ability to accurately identify emotions and judge whether an expression of emotion was honest.

95

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE THROUGH ART

This unit focuses on emotional literacy, and a grasp of the seven major human emotions: joy,

fear, anger, sadness, surprise, and disgust, as identified by Izard (1971), a seminal scholar in

human emotions. Major violent conflict at school can be avoided if students feel equipped with

the language to express how they are feeling. The unit project is a set of emotions masks that

students create and add sounds and motions resulting in a class-wide theatrical performance.

The project also helps students to begin to grow comfortable working as an ensemble.

Unit Three: How do I solve my problems? Conflict-resolution is a personal skill

constantly needed in day-to-day life, both at school and home. Being able to identify a

problem and solve it safely engages students in the kinds of critical thinking skills they will

need for their entire lives. This unit focuses on encouraging students to take ownership of

their actions, and to seek solutions to tricky problems they may face at school, from bullying to

attention deficit to cognitive frustration. The unit project is a “guide to life” book that includes

students’ paintings of difficult scenarios in their day-to-day lives, and their proposals for

solutions.

Unit Four: How can I work with others? Once students have established foundational

skills necessary for success in their day-to-day lives, they can begin to work collaboratively.

The unit project is a life-scale sculpture of an emotions “monster” that students create

together, and collaboratively decide its use. The “monster” is constructed from chicken

wire and corrugated cardboard, and is then covered in papier mâche. The students paint it

collaboratively and add facial features made of modeling clay, painted cardboard, and paper

constructions. A group of students might decide to put the “monster” in the school library to

“watch” over readers, or to keep it as a reference in the special education classroom.

Initial Results of EITA

In the 2011–2012 school year, the first year data was collected, results were gathered

on total behavioral referrals by EITA participating students, that is, referrals sent by teachers

to the principal signifying that the student needed to be removed from the classroom due to

significant behavior infractions. The study group included eight students: two in first grade,

two in second grade, and four in third grade. Half the students in the group had Individual

96

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE THROUGH ART

Education Plans and were identified as having EBD; the other half had accumulated the highest

number of behavior referrals in their grade. Altogether, the students entered the group with a

mean average of 24 behavior referrals per month, which was more than one referral for every

school day. The student who entered the group with the most behavior referrals had received

31 referrals in the month of September.

By May, the average amount of monthly behavioral referrals for the group was down to

four. Three of the students in the group (two of whom had IEPs for EBD) received no behavioral

referrals at all for the month of March. One of the students identified as having EBD was

moved from a self-contained setting for students with EBD into a full inclusion setting, and had

extended her school day from four hours to six.

Students’ work was evaluated using a rubric that attempted to measure four main

components over the course of the school year: emotional expression, ensemble work, self-

acceptance, and art habits (see Appendix A). The rubric ranged from 1 to 4, with 1 indicating

a complete deficiency in the skill area, and 4 indicating mastery of the skill area. After the first

session, students received an average score of 1.8 in emotional expression, 1.2 in ensemble

work, 1.2 in self-acceptance, and 2.3 in art habits. By the final session in May, students scored

an average of 3.5 in emotional expression, 3.0 in ensemble work, 3.0 in self-acceptance, and

3.8 in art habits.

When students spoke in individual interviews about their successes, they unanimously

recited the three yearlong class objectives, (a) expressing oneself in words and art, (b) working

as an ensemble, and (c) recognizing one’s own work as unique and special, which they started

practicing during the first session. Daniel (see Footnote 1), age nine years old, said, “I just really

love making art. I didn’t used to think I was good at really anything before, but I am really good

at making different kinds of lines. That’s something that makes me unique. I was the only one

in our class who could do more than 50 types of lines. That just makes me calm. I feel like I

can just draw lines when I get frustrated.” Daniel’s comments demonstrate a firm grasp of the

third objective, since he now sees the value in his own work. Ann (see Footnote 1), age seven

years old, said, “Working as an ensemble means you are working together like a team. You do

97

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE THROUGH ART

that with all games. Like the elephant game, where I had to be an elephant. You can’t play the

elephant game if you don’t work in an ensemble.” Ann’s comment shows her ownership and

grasp of the second objective: being able to work as an ensemble. Other students used the

word “calm” as well, citing the soothing quality of creating art in any setting.

Data from the EITA program indicated that students benefited from engagement in arts

integrated social emotional learning. While students demonstrated marked improvements in

behaviors when participating in EITA, there was not an element of control for other variables

that might have contributed to student success. Hence, the EITA program might not have been

the only influence on improved behaviors, but there are strong indicators that its intended

goals were met.

Conclusions

Targeted arts-integrated instruction for students with EBD and behavioral differences

has dramatic effects on how students experience school as a whole. The success participants

have in small groups engaging in experiential, arts-based learning translates to the general

education setting, and students begin to focus on academic subjects as well as arts subjects.

The majority of students with EBD thrive when they are given structured, safe, artistic

freedom to create. They begin to demonstrate pride in their work, and they are able to

translate that self-respect into other parts of their lives. Students provided with arts-integrated

sessions that include ample time for student work and exploration, small group instruction,

celebration of engagement as success, minimization of teacher talk, explicit vocabulary

building around emotional language, and role-playing, can improve behaviorally enough to

integrate successfully into general education settings.

98

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE THROUGH ART

CATEGORY 4 3 2 1EmotionalExpression

Student expressed herself if and when she was feeling uncomfortable using complex sentences that included feeling words. She spoke with an adult or a peer about her feelings, and created a complete work of art that showed knowledge of her emotional state.

Student expressed herself using words if and when she was feeling uncomfortable. She used at least one feeling word (including comfortable or uncomfortable), and created a complete work of art.

Student may have used words to express an emotion, but did not necessarily use feeling words, or convey her emotion effectively to an adult or peer. She created a complete work of art.

Student was withdrawn and did not attempt to communicate her emotions.

Ensemble Work

Student worked with other students in the group as a leader and/or as an active and listening group member. She helped delegate group tasks. She said please and thank you and volunteered to help others when she noticed they needed help.

Student was an active group member. She said please and thank you and volunteered to help others when she noticed they needed help.

Student occasionally worked with the group. She said please and thank you most of the time and was able to share sometimes.

Student refused to participate with the group.

RubiStar Rubric Made Using:

RubiStar (http://rubistar.4teachers.org)

Collaborative Work Skills: Emotional Intelligence Through Art

Teacher Name: Ms. Johnson

Student Name: _________________________________

Appendix A

99

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE THROUGH ART

CATEGORY 4 3 2 1Self- Acceptance

Student displayed pride for her own work by giving it compliments when prompted, or offered optimistic ideas of how she might wish to make it better in the future. She created a work that was unique and all its own—she did not copy off a sample, but showed confidence in creating her own details.

Student was positive about her work when prompted. She created a work that was unique—she added her own details.

Student was neutral about her work when prompted. She may have copied many elements of her work from a sample or a neighbor.

Student said negative things about her work, or asked for excessive assistance in creating it.

Art Habits Student demonstrated understanding of the art objective in conversation or during a written check-out. She applied knowledge of the art concept to her work. She used supplies respectfully, and cleaned up when the session was finished.

Student demonstrated understanding of the art objective in conversation or during a written check-out. She mostly used supplies respectfully, and cleaned up when the session was finished.

Student demonstrated partial understanding of the art objective in conversation or during a written check-out, She sometimes used supplies respectively, and partially cleaned up when the session was finished.

Student did not demonstrate understanding of the art objective. She was disrespectful to supplies and did not clean up upon prompting.

Date Created: Nov 04, 2013 08:19 am (CST)

Copyright © 2000-2007 Advanced Learning Technologies in Education Consortia ALTEC

To view information about the Privacy Policies and the Terms of Use, please go to the following web address: http://rubistar.4teachers.org/index.php?screen=TermsOfUse

100

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE THROUGH ART

References

Arlington, J. (2009). Re-investing in arts education: Winning America’s future through creative

schools. President’s Committee of Arts and the Humanities. Retrieved from http://www.

pcah.gov/sites/default/files/photos/PCAH Report Summary and Recommendations.pdf

Babbel, S. (2011). Post traumatic stress disorder after 9/11 and Katrina. Retrieved from http://

www.psychologytoday.com/blog/somatic-psychology/201109/post-traumatic-stress-disorder-

after-911-and-katrina

Barber, S. (2003). The implications of emotional/ behavioral disorder in the classroom. (Master’s

thesis, Liberty University) Retrieved from http://digitalcommons.liberty.edu/cgi/

viewcontent.cgi?article=1164&context=honors)

Brault, M. W. (2011). School-aged children with disabilities in u.s. metropolitan statistical areas:

2010. United States Census Bureau, US Department of Commerce. Retrieved from

http://www.census.gov/prod/2011pubs/acsbr10-12.pdf

CASEL. (2013). About CASEL. Retrieved from http://www.casel.org/about

Davis, M. R., Culotta, V. P., Levine, E. A., & Rice, E. H. (2011). Emotional and behavioral

disorder. Waco, TX: Profrock Press.

Durlak, J., Weissberg, R. P., Dymnicki, A. B., Taylor, R. D., & Schellinger, K. B. (2011). The impact

of enhancing students’ social and emotional learning: A meta-analysis of school-based

universal interventions. Child Development, 82(1), 405-432.

Henion, A., & Elder, T. (2010). Nearly 1 million children potentially misdiagnosed with ADHD.

Retrieved from http://msutoday.msu.edu/news/2010/nearly-1-million-children-

potentially-misdiagnosed-with-adhd/

Individuals With Disabilities Education Act, 20 U.S.C. § 1400 (2004). Retrieved from http://idea.

ed.gov/explore/home

Izard, C. E., (1971). The face of emotion. New York, NY: Appleton-Century-Crofts.

Kauffman, J. M., & Landrum, T. J. (2009). Characteristics of emotional and behavioral disorders

of children and youth (9th ed). New York, NY: Pearson.

101

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE THROUGH ART

Kidsmart: What we do? (2012). Retrieved from http://www.kidsmart.org/what_we_do.html

Lair, C. A., & McComas, J. (2005). Students with emotional/behavioral disorders: Promoting

positive outcomes. Impact, 18(2). 98-105.

Langley, A., Kataoka, S., Stein, B., & Stein, B. (2012). Responding to students with

PTSD in schools. Retrieved from http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/

PMC3287974/?report=classic

Maggi, L. (2012). New Orleans middle-school students describe high rates of depression. New

Orleans Times Picayune. Retrieved from http://www.nola.com/health/index.ssf/2012/12/

new_orleans_middle-school_stud.html

National Center for Education Statistics. (2008). Number of 14 through 21 year old students

served under the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act, Part B, who, who exited

school by exit reason, age, and type of disability: United States and other jurisdictions,

2004-05 and 2005-06. Retrieved from http://nces.ed.gov/programs/disgest/d08/tables/

dt08_111.asp

Mayer, J. D., & Salovey, P. (1993). The intelligence of emotional intelligence. Intelligence, 17,

433-442.

Mayer, J. D., & Salovey, P. (1997). What is emotional intelligence? In P. Salovey & D. J. Sluyter

(Eds.), Emotional development and emotional intelligence: Educational implications

(pp. 3- 31). New York, NY: Basic Books.

Pacer Center. (2006). What is an emotional or behavioral disorder? Pacer Center Action

Information Sheets. Minneapolis, MN: Pacer Center: Champions for Children with

Disabilities. Retrieved from http://www.pacer.org/parent/php/PHP-c81.pdf

Sexual Assault Centre, U. (2008). What is a Trigger?. Psych Central. Retrieved on January 10,

2014, from http://psychcentral.com/lib/what-is-a-trigger/0001414

Stullken, E. (1931). Special education for behavior problems. The Phi Delta Kappan, 14, 5-8.

U.S. Department of Education, Office of Special Education Programs. (2006). Individual

education programs (IEP). Retrieved from http://www2.ed.gov/parents/needs/speced/

iepguide/index.html?exp=3

102

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE THROUGH ART

Wagner, M., Kutash, K., Duchnowski, A.J., & Epstein, M. H. (2005). The Special Education

Elementary Longitudinal Student and the National Longitudinal Transition Study: Study

designs and implications for children and youth with emotional disturbance. Journal of

Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 13, 25-41.

103

Fostering Resilience in an Intergenerational Art and Literacy Program for Homeless Families: An Analysis of Curriculum1

DONALYN HEISE AND LAURIE MACGILLIVRAY2

There is a dearth of information about specific ways curriculum can address resilience

with families with special needs. In this paper, we focus on the way an art and literacy program

at a shelter for homeless families fostered resilience (defined below). To develop the curriculum

for the program we drew on our previous experiences at this shelter (Heise & MacGillivray,

2011; MacGillivray, Ardell, & Curwen, 2010b), our work with families with special needs

across multiple school and community-based programs, and related literature. The following

research question guided our inquiry: What are ways to address resilience in the curriculum of

an art and literacy program? This paper builds on existing research addressing the potential

of art to serve families with special needs. For the purposes of this paper, the term “special

needs” indicates families dealing with a myriad of obstacles surrounding homelessness. This

population experiences a high percentage of students with disabilities (Wilder Research, 2013).

This paper represents one aspect of our research on the nature of interactions surrounding an

intergenerational arts and literacy program.

Homelessness cuts across ethnicity, social class and parental age, however mothers are

overwhelmingly the head of household (US Conference of Mayors, 2012). A range of causes

lead a family to become homeless including unaffordable housing, low wages/lack of job

opportunities, loss of job, and lack of health care insurance (US Conference of Mayors, 2012).

However further reasons are hopelessly commingled and include mental, physical, and social

health issues; drug/alcohol addiction; spousal abuse; incarceration of a parent, and natural

disasters (Larson & Meehan, 2011; Wilder Research, 2013). The ramifications for children

include: a higher rate of physical and mental illness, a rise in school mobility, increased grade

retention (Rafferty, Shinn, & Weitzman, 2004; Stronge, 2002), poor academic achievement

(Noll & Watkins, 2003; Sinatra, 2007; Cutuli, Desjardins, Herbers, Long, Heistad, Chan, Hinz,

1 This research was a collaboration of the Salvation Army Renewal Place and The University of Memphis, generously supported by a Strengthening Communities Capacity-Building Grant. We appreciate the efforts and expertise of lead teachers, Judy Pace and Gretchen Skypeck who played an essential role in this program.

2 The authors contributed equally to this paper.

104

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

& Masten, 2013; Walker-Dalhouse & Risko, 2008) and an increased likelihood of placement in

special education (Larson & Meehan, 2011). In fact, half of homeless mothers reported having

at least one school-age child with learning problems (Wilder Research, 2013).

Mobility is one of the key barriers to assessment and access to special services. One

study found 45% of sheltered homeless children warranted special education evaluation;

however, only 1/4 of those had received any testing or services at all (Zima, Bussing, Forness,

& Benjamin, 1997). It is not unusual for a child to be assessed and special education deemed

appropriate yet the paperwork needed to implement the placement is not available for

several months. The family relocates and the child fails to receive needed specialized services

(MacGillivray, Ardell, & Curwen, 2010a; 2010b). However, schools across the country are trying

to be responsive to homeless children by: (a) designating a specific person to spearhead

services; (b) offering services such as transportation to the home school to allow for school

stability; (c) offering more timely health, mental, and academic assessments; and (4) improving

communication between schools within and across districts (Gargiulo, 2006; MacGillivray et al.,

2010a; Sinatra, 2007).

Shelters can be “safe havens” for families who are experiencing homelessness.

Although they provide much needed stability, families still face difficulties (Herman, 1997).

Living side-by-side with other families experiencing crisis and having to follow strict shelter

guidelines can be challenging (MacGillivray et al., 2010a; 2010b). Mothers in shelters for

families who are homeless are often strategic about accessing services. These skills are

essential for obtaining and maintaining residence. Mothers often use free resources such as

those offered by churches and schools to support their family emotionally and academically

(MacGillivray et al., 2010b).

Children also develop strategies for handling life in a shelter, such as talking about

religious practices as a way to make an immediate connection with new acquaintances

(MacGillivray, et al., 2010a). The instability of homeless children’s lives requires care be taken

so assessments are accurate and outcomes are not reflective of a short-term situation. This is

particularly important for families in need of long-term special education services. We assert

105

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

teaching children and parents about resilience is one way to address the negative events in

their lives (Heise, 2013).

This qualitative research examines an intergenerational art and literacy program

designed to foster resilience in children and their mothers who are residing in a family

homeless shelter for mothers who are addicted to drugs and alcohol. We begin with a

review of the research on resilience, family resilience specifically, and art-related curriculum.

We then describe the context and population, the art and literacy program curriculum, the

methodology, and our findings. This is followed by a discussion of the attributes of the

curriculum that develop resilience.

Related Literature

Resilience

Werner and Smith’s (1992) foundational longitudinal study with youth who were

considered at-risk led to resilience research that focuses on how and why some people struggle

when exposed to high risk while others experience positive adaptation (Reed-Victor & Stronge

2002). Resilience is defined in the literature as the ability to cope despite adversity (Benard,

1991; Heise, 2013; Krovetz, 2007) and adjust positively to challenging life conditions. With

a similar focus, Masten (2001) defined resilience as “a class of phenomena characterized by

good outcomes in spite of serious threats to adaptation or development” (p. 228). Threats to

human development can affect positive adaptation. For resilience to occur, two things must

be present: risk and positive adaptation. Risks can include challenges associated with physical

disabilities, social and emotional distress, exposure to violence, trauma associated with natural

or environmental disasters, poverty, abuse or neglect. Resilience in children is often associated

with positive academic outcomes and social emotional well-being (Werner, 2005).

Resilience is a dynamic construct, not a fixed trait (Heise, 2013; Ibeagha, Balogun, &

Adejuwon, 2004; Rutter, 2012). It is not something one is born with, but something that can

be developed over time. It involves repeated thoughts and actions that deepen the ability

to adapt to life-threatening events. Resilience is cumulative; repeated successful adaptation

despite exposure to risks contributes to positive outcomes in the future (Heise, 2013; Rutter,

2012).

106

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

However, literature in the field revealed challenges in conceptualizing resilience (Luthar,

Cicchetti & Becker , 2000). Some researchers referred to resilience as a concept or construct

(Lietz, 2007; Luthar, et al., 2000). Masten (2001) and Benard (1991,1993) considered resilience a

phenomenon, while others called it a condition (Knight, 2007). Some used the term attributes

(Benard, 1991, 1993; Bosworth & Walz, 2005; Krovetz, 2007), characteristics (Reed-Victor &

Stronge, 2002; Werner, 2005), and external factors and/or environmental factors (Gizir & Aydin,

2009; Reed-Victor & Stronge, 2002). Further confusion is fueled when labels are categorized

in multiple ways. For instance, Garmezy (1993) categorized resilience into individual, family

and external support, some (Luthar et al., 2000), distinguished between individual protective

factors and contextual protective factors while others (Brendtro & Larson, 2006) included

environmental factors.

After examining numerous articles on resilience in the field, we discovered common

lists of attributes that are believed to be protective factors that foster resilience. The attributes

that appeared most often were a sense of community (McCubbin & McCubbin, 1992), a sense

of purpose (Seligman, Steen, & Part, 2005), communication skills (McCubbin & McCubbin,

1992), creativity (Wolin & Wolin, 1993), flexibility (Chen & Kovacs, 2013), humor (Lietz, 2007),

metacognition (Luthar et al., 2000), optimism (Herrman, Stewart, Diaz-Granados, Berger,

Jackson, & Yuen, 2011), persistence (Benard, 1991, 1993), personal accomplishment (Rutter,

1987), problem solving ability (Werner, 2005), resourcefulness (Krovetz, 2007) and vision for the

future (Knight, 2007). There were also common (recurring) external factors that were sometimes

referred to in the literature as environmental factors that foster resilience. These included

opportunities for meaningful participation (Krovetz, 2007), nurturing caring environment

(Benard, 1991, 1993), family recreation (Black and Lobo, 2008), routines and rituals (Wolin &

Wolin, 1993).

Recent theoretical and empirical research also suggests the ability to attach meaning to

an experience contributes to successful coping as does the ability to learn from the experience

(Bogar & Hulse-Killacky, 2006; Everly, Smith, & Lating, 2009; Heise, 2013). When children

engage in creative activities and experience personal satisfaction from mastery of skills or joy of

exploration, they are less likely to dwell on negative events in their lives (Chen & Kovacs, 2013;

107

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

Werner, 2005). This concept relates to what is sometimes referred to as the “Compensatory

Effect,” an intervention strategy that is based on the idea if you add more assets or resources

to a child’s life, they can counterbalance the negative effects (Garmezy, Masten, & Tellegen,

1984).

In addition to individual attributes, studies suggest family competence is strongly

associated with resilience. Family resilience refers to positive behavioral patterns and

functional competence that encourages well-being and enables families to cope or recover

from crises (McCubbin & McCubbin, 1996; Walsh, 1996). Being flexible and thereby able to

adapt to stressful conditions is considered to be a strength of resilient families (McCubbin

& McCubbin, 1996; Trivette, Dunst, Deal, Hamer, & Propst, 1990). Lietz (2007) considered

focusing on developing strengths, especially with high-risk families such as those experiencing

homelessness, as more important than emphasizing reducing risks. She suggested

interventions such as modeling humor, teaching boundary setting, and encouraging problem

solving can increase resilience. Similarly, Chen and Kovacs (2013) suggested practices that help

families discover resources and abilities develop family relationships and social supports and,

in turn, enhance communication. Black and Lobo (2008) identified characteristics of resilient

families as positive outlook, spirituality, flexibility, and joint problem solving.

Across the work on individual and family resilience, there is an emphasis on building

on strengths as a way to face adversity. The families in the Art and Literacy Program have

faced many obstacles and will face more in the future. The research on resilience suggests that

developing families’ current coping strategies increases their resilience particularly with children

with special needs.

Art Curriculum

A review of literature revealed an emphasis on designing art curriculum that

moves beyond focusing solely on principles and elements of design and towards a more

comprehensive approach that links learning to real life (Anderson & Milbrandt, 2005; Gude,

2007). Wiggins and McTighe (2005) advocated curricula centered on essential understandings

or enduring ideas. Walker (2001) addressed art curricula specifically and advocated the concept

of deeper understanding and thematic inquiry to promote meaningful learning.

108

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

Art is recognized as an avenue to develop multiple skills and abilities, as well as nurture

cognitive, social, and personal development (Catterall, Dumais, & Hampden-Thompson,

2012; Fiske, 2000). Art education curriculum lends itself to a resilience approach. Quality arts

education allows for personal creative expression that can engage and empower students

to generate new insights into their lives (Heise, 2013). A resilience approach to curriculum

development focuses on strengthening protective factors that are believed to contribute to

positive outcomes. This is especially relevant with families with special needs because art can

be used to construct and express personal meanings and help children and adults understand

themselves and their world (Gerber & Guay, 2006). Art education, at its best, emphasizes

access to art for all students, differentiated instruction, pedagogy that allows choices in the

learning process, and collaborative partnerships for meeting the diverse needs of all students

(Gerber & Guay, 2006; Hunter & Johns, 2006).

Although there are ample studies on resilience, there is a lack of research focusing on

resilience and art for families with special needs. Our research used a resilience framework to

design and implement a program focusing on individual and family strengths. In this paper,

we analyze the ways resilience theory was embedded in the curriculum of an art and literacy

program in a shelter for families who are homeless.

Context and Population

Our population consisted of mothers and children who were residing in the Salvation

Army Renewal Place shelter, a multifaceted two-year program that offers residents support

with 12-step programs, therapy, financial support, and parenting classes. There are three

requirements for women to enter the program: they must be homeless; have custody of a child

who is under the age of 10; and be addicted to drugs/alcohol. There are three goals for each

mother: maintain a residence; hold down a job; and develop positive parenting skills. There

are typically 12 mothers with two to four children in their custody. Each family has a room and

private bathroom off of one long hall. There is one common room where meetings take place

and families spend time on the weekends. All meals are offered in a cafeteria.

The women range in age from 18 to 45, are typically African American or White. The

mothers have a range of educational experiences from completing 10th grade to obtaining

109

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

an advanced degree. Initially the women must stay “on the floor” and intensely focus on

becoming and remaining clean and sober. Over time they begin to participate in schooling and

12-step programs around the city.

The children in the shelter range in age from newborns to the age of 10. However, for

the Art and Literacy Program they needed to be six years of age or older. Many of the children

are just being reunited with their mothers after living with friends and families or being in a

foster home. For some women, entering the program was a condition of being able to have

custody of their children. For many children, the physical instability and emotional upheavals

are evident in their academics (See Table 1 for Children’s Demographics).

There is a caseworker assigned just for the children. Her focus is two-pronged: first

to develop positive parenting skills through modeling and explicit teaching; and second,

to oversee the children’s academic success and physical/mental health. The mothers are

expected to have a close relationship with the children’s teachers and to be active in any

educational decisions. It is not uncommon for the caseworker to attend meetings at the

school with the mothers (and stand in when mothers are unavailable) to monitor the children’s

progress. She works especially closely with the mothers when special services are being

considered. Staff members believe a mother’s ability to play an active role in IEP (Individual

Education Plan) meetings is a hallmark of successful parenting.

Curriculum Description

The goal for the intergenerational art and literacy program was to develop participants’

understanding of resilience and create a non-academic space for mothers and children to

read, write, and create art. In collaboration with staff at the Salvation Army we designed the

broad scope of the curriculum. Together we decided to use a resilience framework and the

overarching theme for the program, Finding Beauty in Unexpected Places. We felt these would

be particularly appropriate for families who have faced many obstacles and may not be aware

of their strengths and, relatedly, may need to develop the ability to literally find the beauty

around them.

110

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

The curriculum included a variety of art media (pencil, markers, clay, paper) and art

production (drawing, painting, printmaking, sculpting, collage, collaborative sculptures).

The content also addressed aesthetics and the language of art. The literacy components

encompassed reading children’s literature, creating shape poems, and keeping a journal,

reflecting on sticky notes, and creating a collaborative book.

Seventeen lesson plans were developed over the span of the program and included

three field trips (See Table 2 for Curriculum Overview). Five sessions were held in the fall. This

time was used to build relationships and explore the best way to implement an art and literacy

program and determine which attributes of resilience were most relevant in this context.

We met with the mothers prior to implementation and continued to draw on their insights

throughout the program.

In the spring, teachers were hired to work collaboratively with us to develop and

implement 12 sessions, including the three field trips. The lesson plans were detailed and

thoughtful. In a traditional classroom, curriculum would be guided by state and national

academic standards. In this informal setting, we created an integrated framework that

connected developing individual and family social/emotional well-being with attention to

nurturing positive experiences with reading, writing, and creating art. University students

assisted in the implementation of the program.

The curriculum drew from literature related to art, literacy, and special education to

focus on factors of resilience deemed most relevant to our specific population: (a) a sense of

community; (b) a sense of humor; (c) a sense of purpose; (d) creativity; (e) communication skills;

(f) optimism; (g) persistence; (h) personal accomplishment; (i) positive outlook; (j) problem

solving; (k) resourcefulness; (l) metacognition; and (m) vision for the future. We operationalize

a sense of community as perceived social bonding and interdependence with others, and a

sense of humor as the ability to laugh even in the face of adversity.

We define a sense of purpose as the ability to see something larger than yourself.

Creativity is considered the ability to think of new and original things, to find multiple solutions

to problems and the ability to adapt to changing circumstances (flexibility and fluency).

111

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

Communication skills include effective use of visual and verbal language to express thoughts

and ideas. Optimism is a positive outlook or positive attitude. Persistence is defined as solving

a problem without giving up, persevering despite challenges. Personal accomplishment

relates to individual pride in something achieved or successfully completed. Positive outlook

includes a positive expectation for the future. Problem solving is defined as the mental and

physical processes in solving problems. Resourcefulness requires finding and using resources.

Metacognition is the awareness or analysis of one’s own learning or thinking processes. Vision

for the future encompasses focusing on something beyond the present.

Three field trips were part of the curriculum (Sessions 7, 8, & 11) and extended the

learning and supported the theme of Finding Beauty in Unexpected Places. The first field trip

was to a recycle center to provide opportunity to learn about recycled, reused, and repurposed

materials. The second was a trip to the National Ornamental Metal Museum to observe metal

artists creating in the smithy and foundry and for participants to create metal engravings. The

focus of these field trips was developing creativity and resourcefulness. The final field trip was

to the art gallery on the University of Memphis campus for the exhibition of the participants’

creative work. Developing a sense of personal accomplishment and vision for the future were

the attributes emphasized on this field trip.

Methodology

This was a qualitative case study grounded in sociocultural theory. Our findings were

situated in a specific context with a particular population. Both researchers examined each

lesson plan asking, “What are the ways the curriculum addressed resilience?” The first step

of the process required going back into the literature on resilience to review attributes. Our

analysis found the curriculum addressed some attributes that were not explicitly targeted in the

lessons. As we analyzed the curriculum we continued to hone the factors of resilience.

Ultimately we arrived at the following list of attributes that participants had an

opportunity to develop during the program: (a) a sense of community; (b) a sense of humor;

(c) a sense of a literate self; (d) a sense of personal accomplishment; (e) a sense of purpose;

(f) creativity; (g) optimism; (h) persistence; (i) resourcefulness; and (j) vision for the future. We

112

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

developed an additional term because interactions with print were central to the curriculum

and the only related term in the literature was communication, which seemed too broad. Thus

we decided to add our own term, “a sense of a literate self” to document interactions with text

because feeling confident as a reader or writer is an attribute of resilience. The term included

consuming (reading) and creating (writing) text. But we also included acts of emergent literacy.

For example, we considered creating a picture on a Sticky note in response to a prompt as the

behavior of a writer.

After deciding on the most relevant attributes of resilience and adding a sense

of a literate self, we returned to the lesson plans to analyze the relationship between the

curriculum and resilience. A “constant comparison method” (Glaser and Strauss, 1967) was

used throughout the process. Data were reviewed and analyzed during multiple iterations (Yin,

1994) in an effort to determine attributes of resilience and also the most telling aspect of the

curriculum.

Ultimately, the analysis showed that four weekly components best captured the

relationship between resilience and the curriculum. (a) “Art Activities” referred to the “art”

project of the week and tended to be the main focus of each lesson plan. (b) “Sticky notes”

entailed a process of reflection which was guided by a prompt related to the curriculum, such

as “Draw/write something you like about your family or a family celebration.” Participants

took two and responded in the same way on both sticky notes, placed one in their personal

journal and the other on a community bulletin board. (c) “Interactive Read Alouds” occurred

each week, either before or after the “art activity.” The lesson plans called for a teacher-led

discussion among mothers and children around predictions and personal connections to the

text. (d) “Book Check Out” was a weekly event with children and mothers checking out books

from a large selection of children’s literature.

Findings

The findings demonstrated the way the curriculum supported resilience through varied

content and a range of activities. Participants were given opportunities to develop a range

of attributes of resilience that in turn aid in facing adversity. We present the findings through

113

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

an analysis of four key components of the program (see Table 3 for an Analysis of Resilience

Attributes by Key Components). We also found it helpful to differentiate the process and

the content within each component. The process of each component, such as the act of

creating art, responding to prompts on sticky notes, and interacting with literature, afforded

the opportunity to develop many attributes of resilience. The content (reflected in the theme,

guiding question, and the sticky note prompts of each of these activities) created a chance

to develop further attributes. The findings are structured so the connection between the

curriculum and resilience is evident both across key components and within individual lessons.

Below we highlight aspects of the findings. When examined together, Tables 2 and 3 offer

details of the curriculum and findings.

Art Activities

The process of the “Art Activities” offered participants a chance to develop a sense of

accomplishment, a sense of community, creativity, persistence, and resourcefulness because

it demanded manipulating and sharing recycled materials to complete the art activity. For

example, participants made name collages the first two weeks by tearing and gluing paper that

they previously painted. The creation of the name collage in and of itself offered a chance to

develop these attributes of resilience. At one point after paper had been painted, participants

exchanged torn pieces of paper with their peers and used these in their own collages. In this

way a sense of community was nurtured.

In contrast to the process of the task, the content led participants to develop other

attributes. This was evident in all of the activities. For example, a focus on the meaning of

names and family stories in conjunction with making the name collages nurtured the additional

attribute of developing a sense of purpose. Making necklaces with recycled materials also

offered the opportunity to develop a sense of purpose when the activity was framed as a

chance to think about how we can share with others. A vision for the future was addressed in

a discussion about finding balance in one’s own life during the creation of butterflies from 3D

paper sculpture made from recycled paper.

114

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

Sticky Notes

The process of responding to prompts on sticky notes placed in a personal journal and

a community bulletin board afforded the development of four attributes of resilience. This

kind of composing required creativity. The completion of the sticky notes developed a sense

of personal accomplishment and a sense of a literate self. Posting one’s writing alongside that

of others offered a sense of community. However, the content of prompts for the sticky notes

increased the number of connections to resilience. For example, the sticky notes in five of the

nine lessons included an opportunity to develop a sense of optimism. Prompts such as: “Draw

or write something you like about your family or family celebrations;” “Draw or write something

you would like to repeat;” and “Select an empowering word” encouraged viewing the world in

a positive way. Only two (resourcefulness and persistence) of the attributes were not addressed

in the process and content of the sticky notes. Based on this analysis, we know they could have

been addressed with a related prompt if this was deemed desirable.

Interactive Read Alouds

Overall, the analysis found that all 10 attributes were connected with at least one of

the “Interactive Read Alouds.” The nature of “Interactive Read Alouds” supported a sense of

community, a sense of a literate self, and creativity. Gathering together to hear and discuss

a children’s picture storybook led to rich group discussions. Participating in a text-centered

activity was an opportunity to act like both a reader and writer. The content of individual books

supported further attributes including humor, a sense of purpose, and vision for the future.

For example, The Magnificent Monarchs by Linda Glaser, in the fifth lesson focused on the

long flight of the butterflies emphasized by studying a map of their flight. The content of this

“Interactive Read Aloud” invited participants to appreciate something larger than themselves.

Book Check Out

With “Book Check Out” we coded only for the process of this component because

the collection of available books included a wide range of topics. Many books were perused

during book selection time so examining checkout records would not accurately reflect the

families’ interaction with print. This activity was the only one in which the mothers and children

needed to make decisions together. Either the families looked through the books together or

115

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

each child would select a book and show it to her/his mother for approval. Finding the right

book was an opportunity to experience a sense of personal accomplishment. The very act

of checking out a book offered an opportunity to develop optimism, a sense of community,

and a vision for the future rooted in a tacit commitment to read the books individually and/or

together.

Discussion

This analysis reveals the breadth of the relationship between the curriculum of an

art and literacy program and resilience. There were a number of opportunities for participants

to develop attributes of resilience that we did not foresee when we were developing the

curriculum. Each lesson had been designed to focus on a single attribute. However, analysis

indicated an array of attributes was addressed.

First, specific art processes offered an opportunity to develop a wider range of the

attributes of resilience because of the talk that surrounded the activity. This extends the

research on meaningful and thematic art curriculum (Anderson & Milbrandt, 2005; Gude, 2007;

Wiggins & McTighe, 2005) to include a resilience framework as a way to connect art to life. For

example, the act of making prints allowed for a connection to be made between repetition and

exploring what is worth repeating in one’s life. Similarly, painting boxes moved beyond the skill

of painting, into a reflection on a vision for one’s self and family. The nature of the art activities

made the connection to larger themes possible. Thus for us we kept the resilience theme in

the forefront of our minds as we designed the activities. Especially for families with special

needs, these kinds of thoughtful art lessons can encourage creativity, develop self-esteem, and

establish a sense of community.

Second, literacy activities that focused on process and reflection were associated with a

greater number of resilience attributes. The curriculum tied to resiliency was in the diversity of

ways participants’ interacted with text. During curriculum design we focused primarily on the

“Art Activities” and “Interactive Read Alouds.” However, most of the attributes of resilience

were associated with the process and/or content of the sticky notes. The opportunities to use

text and pictures for reflection were particularly important for families in the Renewal Place

116

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

program because there can often be an overwhelming number of time consuming mandated

tasks associated with living in a shelter (MacGillivray, 2010; MacGillivray, Ardell, Curwen,

2010a; 2010b). The sticky notes afforded participants a chance to pause and commit their own

thoughts to paper. Having a private place to post their ideas is a luxury in a homeless shelter

where families share one room. In contrast, posting their sticky note publicly alongside others

develops a sense of community. For families who have moved numerous times, nurturing

relationships is crucial

Third, the role of the “Book Checkout” also related to more of the resilient attributes

than first imagined. The development of a sense of a literate self nurtured resilience as well as

other attributes such as a sense of community and vision for the future. Allowing children to

select their own books is consistent with Gerber & Guay’s (2006) emphasis on the importance

of choice-making in the learning process for diverse learners and was particularly important

with children who are homeless. Upon further reflection we realized how “Book Checkout”

allowed families to connect. It was not solely an issue of leaving the session with a book, but

rather the tacit commitment to read together during the week. This activity was particularly

important to a family torn apart due to a mother’s addiction. Reading books together can be a

positive way for families to spend time. Checking out engaging children’s literature increases

the chance of constructive family interactions.

Conclusion

This study examined the way the curriculum of an art and literacy program used a

framework of resilience theory. As colleagues, we drew from each other’s specialties of art and

literacy to design a community-based program with a particular audience in mind. Because

each family who experiences homelessness faces their own unique constellation of risks, it was

especially important to have open-ended art and literacy activities that allowed for children and

mothers to respond in a variety of ways. The attention to resilience afforded the opportunity for

individuals and families to reflect on their strengths and imagine optimistic futures.

In this paper, we extend the work of art educators who have established the need for

connecting art to life (Anderson & Milbrandt, 2005; Gude, 2007). Rather than encouraging this

curriculum be replicated in another setting, we offer it as a model for other community-based

117

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

programs to use a resilience framework to guide their own program design. This research also

demonstrates the way themes, such as Finding Beauty in Unexpected Places, can enhance

curriculum in powerful ways by emphasizing reflection and, specifically, positive ways to

examine the world. We are excited about the prospect of working with other community-based

groups as they design strengths-based programs. Developing curriculum with a resilience

framework can increase access to and engagement in quality arts education in communities

and schools.

References

Anderson, T., & Milbrandt, M. K. (2005). Art for life: Authentic instruction in art. New York:

McGraw-Hill.

Benard, B. (1991). Fostering resiliency in kids: Protective factors in the family, school, and

community. Portland, OR: Western Regional Center for Drug-Free Schools and

Communities, Northwest Educational Laboratory.

Benard, B. (1993). Turning the corner from risk to resiliency. Portland OR: Western Regional

Center for Drug-Free Schools and Communities, Northwest Educational Laboratory.

Black, K. & Lobo, M. (2008). A conceptual review of family resilience factors. Journal of Family

Nursing, 14(1), 33-55.

Brendtro, L. K., & Larson, S. J. (2006). The resilience revolution: Discovering strengths in

challenging kids. Bloomington, IN: Solution Tree.

Bogar, C. B., & Hulse-Killacky, D. (2006). Resiliency determinants and resiliency processes

among female adult survivors of childhood sexual abuse. Journal of Counseling &

Development, 84(3), 318-327

Bosworth, K. & Walz, G.R. (2005). Promoting student resiliency. Alexandria, VA: American

Counseling Association Foundation.

Catterall, J. S., Dumais, S. A., & Hampden-Thompson, G. (2012). The arts and achievement in

at-risk youth: Findings from four longitudinal studies. Washington: National Endowment

for the Arts. Online. Available http://www. nea.gov/research/Arts-At-Risk-Youth.pdf.

Accessed, November 20, 2013.

118

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

Chen, H. J., & Kovacs, P. J. (2013). Working with families in which a parent has depression:

A resilience perspective. Families in Society: The Journal of Contemporary Social

Services, 94(2), 114-120.

Cutuli, J. J., Desjardins, C. D., Herbers, J. E., Long, J. D., Heistad, D., Chan, C. K., Hinz, E.

& Masten, A. S., (2013). Academic achievement trajectories of homeless and highly

mobile students: Resilience in the context of chronic and acute risk. Child Development,

84(3) 841-857.

Everly, G. S., Smith, K. J. & Lating, J. M. (2009). A rationale for cognitively-based resilience

and psychological first aid (PFA) training: A structural modeling analysis. International

Journal of Emergency Mental Health, 11(4), 249-262

Fiske, E. B. (Ed.). (2000). Champions of change: The impact of the arts on learning. President’s

Committee on the Arts and the Humanities, Washington, DC: Arts Education

Partnership.

Gargiulo, R. (2006). Homeless and disabled: Rights, responsibilities, and recommendations for

serving young children with special needs. Early Childhood Education Journal, 33(5),

357-362.

Garmezy, N., Masten, A. S., & Tellegen, A. (1984). The study of stress and competence in

children: A building block for developmental psychopathology. Child Development,

55(1), 97-111.

Garmezy, N. (1993). Children in poverty: Resilience despite risk. Psychiatry, 56, 127-136.

Gerber, B., & Guay, D. (Eds.). (2006). Reaching and teaching students with special needs

through art. Reston, VA: National Art Education Association.

Gizir, C. A., & Aydin, G. (2009). Protective factors contributing to the academic resilience of

students living in poverty in Turkey. Professional School Counseling, 13(1), 38-49.

Glaser, B. G., & Strauss, A. L. (1967). The discovery of grounded theory: Strategies for

qualitative research. Chicago: Aldine.

Gude, O. (2007) Principles of possibilities: Considerations for a 21st century art and culture

curriculum, Art Education, 60(1), 6-17.

119

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

Heise, D. (2013). Fostering resiliency through the arts. In Tavin, K. & Morris, C. B. (Eds.),

Stand up for a change: Voices of arts educators. Reston, VA: National Art Education

Association.

Heise, D. & MacGillivray, L. (2011). Implementing an art program for children in a homeless

shelter. Studies in Art Education, 52(4), 323-336.

Herman, J. (1997). Trauma and recovery: The aftermath of violence—from domestic abuse to

political terror. New York, NY: Basic Books.

Herrman, H., Stewart, D. E., Diaz-Granados, N., Berger, E. L., Jackson, B., & Yuen, T.

(2011). What is resilience? Canadian Journal of Psychiatry. Revue canadienne de

psychiatrie, 56(5), 258-265.

Hunter, A. D. & Johns, B. H. (2006). Students with emotional and/or behavior disorders. In

Gerber, B. L. & Guay, D. M. (Eds.), Reaching and teaching students with special needs

through art. Reston, VA: National Art Education Association.

Ibeagha, P. N., Balogun, S. K., & Adejuwon, G. A., (2004). Resiliency of inner-city youth Yoruba

University undergraduates in southwestern Nigeria. Studies Tribes and Tribals, 2(2), 125-

129.

Knight, C. (2007). A resilience framework: Perspectives for educators. Health Education, 107(6),

543-555.

Krovetz, M. L. (2007). Fostering resilience: Expecting all students to use their minds and hearts

well. Thousand Oaks, CA: Corwin Press.

Larson, A. & Meehan, D. (2011). Homeless and highly mobile students: A population-level

description of the status of homeless students from three school districts, Journal of

Children and Poverty, 17 (2), 187-205, DOI: 10.1080/10796126.2011.529114

Lietz, C. A. (2007). Uncovering stories of family resilience: A mixed methods study of resilient

families, part 2. Families in Society: The Journal of Contemporary Social Services, 88 (1),

147-155. DOI: 10.1606/1044-3894.3602

Luthar, S. S., & Cicchetti, D. & Becker, B. (2000). The construct of resilience: Implications for

interventions and social policies. Development and Psychopathology, 12(4), 857-885.

120

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

MacGillivray, L. (2010). “Hallelujah!” Bible-based literacy practices of children living in a

homeless shelter. In L. MacGillivray (Ed.), Literacy in times of crisis: Practices and

perspectives (pp. 32-46). New York: Routledge.

MacGillivray, L., Ardell, A. L., & Curwen, M. S. (2010a). Libraries, churches and schools: Literate

lives of homeless women and children. Urban Education, 45(2), 221-245.

MacGillivray, L., Ardell, A. L., & Curwen, M. S. (2010b). Supporting the literacy development of

children living in homeless shelters. The Reading Teacher. 63(5) 384-392.

Masten, A. S. (2001). Ordinary magic: Resilience processes in development. American

Psychologist, 56, 227–238.

McCubbin, H. I., & McCubbin, M. A. (1992). Research utilization in social work practice of family

treatment. In A. J. Grasso & I. Epstein (Eds.), Research utilization in the social sciences:

Innovations for practice and administration (pp. 149-192). New York City, NY: Haworth.

McCubbin, M. A., & McCubbin, H. I. (1996). Resiliency in families: A conceptual model of

family adjustment and adaptation in response to stress and crises. In H. I. McCubbin,

A. I. Thompson, & M. A. McCubbin (Eds.), Family assessment: Resiliency, coping and

adaptation: Inventories for research and practice (pp. 1-64). Madison, WI: University of

Wisconsin.

Noll, E. & Watkins, R. (2003). The impact of homelessness on children’s literacy experiences.

The Reading Teacher, 57(4), 362-371.

Rafferty Y., Shinn, M., & Weitzman, B., (2004). Academic achievement among formerly

homeless adolescents and their continuously housed peers. Journal of School

Psychology, 42, 179-199.

Reed-Victor, E. & Stronge, J.H. (2002). Homeless students and resilience: Staff perspectives on

individual and environmental factors. Journal of Children and Poverty, 8(2), 159-173.

Rutter, M. (2012). Resilience as a dynamic concept. Development and Psychopathology, 24(2),

335-344.

Rutter M. (1987). Psychosocial resilience and protective mechanisms. American Journal of

Orthopsychiatry, 57(3), 316-331.

121

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

Seligman, M., Steen, T. A. & Park, N., (2005). Positive psychology progress: Empirical validation

of interventions. The American Psychological Association, 60(5), 410-421.

Sinatra, R. (2007). Literacy success with homeless children. Journal of At-Risk Issues, 13(2), 1-9.

Stronge, J. H. (2002). Educating homeless children and youth: An introduction. In J.H. Stronge

& E. Reed-Victor (Eds.), Educating homeless students: Promising practices (pp. 1-19).

Larchmont, NY: Eye on Education.

Trivette, C. M., Dunst, C. J., Deal, A. G., Hamer, W., & Propst, S. (1990). Assessing family

strengths and family functioning style. Topics in Early Childhood Specialist Education,

10(1), 16-35.

U.S. Conference of Mayors. (2012). Status report on hunger & homelessness. Retrieved 11-1-

2013 from The United States Conference of Mayors http://usmayors.org/publications.

Walsh, F. (1996). The concept of family resilience: Crisis and challenge. Family Process, 35(3),

261-281.

Werner, E. E., & Smith, R. S. (1992). Overcoming the odds: High risk children from birth to

adulthood. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press.

Werner, E. E. (2005). Resilience research. In Resilience in children, families, and

communities (pp. 3-11). New York, NY: Springer US.

Walker-Dalhouse, D., & Risko, V. J. (2008). Homelessness, poverty, and children’s literacy

development. The Reading Teacher, 62(1), 84-86. doi:10.1598/RT.62.1.11.

Walker, S. (2001). Teaching meaning in artmaking. Worchester MA: Davis Publications, Inc.

Wilder Research. (2013). Homelessness in Minnesota: 2012 results. http://www.wilder.org/

Wilder-Research/Publications/Studies/Homelessness%20in%20Minnesota%202012%20

Study/Homelessness%20in%20Minnesota%20-%20Findings%20from%20the%20

2012%20Statewide%20Homeless%20Study.pdf (retrieved October 5, 2013).

Wiggins, G. P., & McTighe, J. A. (2005). Understanding by design. Alexandria, VA:ASCD.

Wolin, S. J., & Wolin, S. (1993). The resilient self. New York: Willard.

Zima, B., Bussing, R., Forness, & Benjamin, B. (1997). Sheltered homeless children: Their

eligibility and unmet need for special education evaluations. American Journal of Public

Health, 87(2), 236-240.

122

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

READ ALOUDS

Carle, Eric. (1998). You can make a collage: A very simple how-to book. Palo Alto, CA: Klutz

Press.

Garza, C. L. (1990). Family pictures/ Cuadros de familia. New York, NY: Children’s Press.

Janeczko, P.B. (2001). Poke in the I: A collection of concrete poems. Somerville, MA:

Candlewick Press.

Keats, E. J. (2001). Pet Show! New York, NY: Penguin Group.

Glaser, L. (2000). Magnificent monarchs. Minneapolis, MN: Millbrook Press.

Reynolds, P. H. (2004). Ish. Somerville, MA: Candlewick Press.

Thomas, P. (1990). Stand back said the elephant, I’m going to sneeze! New York, NY: Harper

Collins.

Myers, C. (2000). Wings. New York, NY: Scholastic Press.

Saltzberg, B. (2010). Beautiful Oops!. New York, NY: Workman Publishing Company.

123

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

Table 1. Characteristics of Children at Renewal Place Who Participated in the Art and Literacy Program (ALP)

N=20

Attended ALP

without parent*

Previously lived with extended

family/friends

Previously lived in Foster care

IEP Gifted

IEP Learning

IEP Behavioral

School frequently requested

parent conference

due to child’s

behavior

Attends Group

Therapy

Attends Individual Therapy

5 20 9 1 9 8 15 18 5

25% 100% 45% 5% 45% 40% 75% 90% 25%

*3 additional children attended some sessions w/o parent **Total number of students with IEPs = 9

124

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

LESSON KEY COMPONENTS

Lesson plan 1Theme: Recognizing strengthsEssential Questions: What does your name mean? Where does it come from? Is it a family name? How does your name make you feel? Why?

Art Activity: Collages (painted and torn paper) Sticky Note: Write/Draw/share your name or something you like about it Book: You Can Make a Collage: A Very Simple How-to Book by Eric Carle

Lesson plan 2Theme: Recognizing strengths and Finding beauty in unexpected places Listed on lesson plan LessonEssential Question: What are some of your strengths?

Art Activity: Completing name collages Sticky Note: Draw/write something you like about your family or a family celebrationBook: Family Pictures/Cuadros de Familia by Carmen Lomas Garza

Lesson Plan 3Theme: Repeating somethingEssential Questions: What is worth repeating? Should we add “finding beauty around us” as a continuing theme?

Art Activity: Prayer Flags (stamp, printing, painting)

Sticky Note: What is worth repeating?Book: Poke in the Eye: A collection of concrete poems by Paul Janeczko and Chris Raschka

Lesson Plan 4Theme: Sharing with othersEssential Questions: How can we share with others?If you were to share a message with someone, what would it be?

Art Activity: Necklaces (writing and folding and tearing paper sculpture)

Sticky Note: How can we share with others? Book: Pet Show! By Ezra Jack Keats

Lesson Plan 5Theme: Balance

Essential Question: How can you find balance?

Art Activity: Butterflies (symmetrical 3D paper sculpture with recycled torn painted paper)

Sticky Note: What helps you find balance in your life?Book: Magnificent Monarchs by Linda Glaser

Table 2. Curriculum Overview of Art and Literacy Program

125

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

LESSON KEY COMPONENTS

Lesson Plan 6Theme: Finding beauty; Repurpose

Essential Questions: What is beauty? Where can you discover it?

Art Activity: Chrysalis (painted sculpture with tissue paper and yarn)Sticky Note: write/draw an image which illustrates balance/ write about what helps to create balanceBook: Ish by Peter H. Reynolds

Lesson Plan 9Theme: Humor

Essential Question: What makes you happy?

Art Activity: Funny animals (air dry clay using recycled objects to add texture)Sticky Note: Draw/Write about something funny Book: Stand Back Said the Elephant, I’m going to Sneeze! By Patricia Thomas

Lesson Plan 10Theme: How can we remain true to our vision?

Essential Question: How can you remain true to our vision?

Art Activity: Boxes w “vision” words (painting, writing)Sticky Note: What word do you want to use to shape your vision? For yourself, your family, your community?Book: Wings by Christopher Myer

Lesson Plan 12Theme: Reflecting on finding beauty in unex-pected places and resilience

Essential Questions: What is a moment you will remember? Why? (Tie into resilience, beauty, or family)

Art Activity: Collaborative Accordion book (cutting, writing)

You will write/draw about: what beauty you find in unexpected places.Sticky Note: Select an empowering word from those providedBook: Beautiful Oops! By Barney Saltzberg

Table 2. (continued) Curriculum Overview of Art and Literacy Program

126

FOSTERING RESILIENCE

29

Table 3

Analysis of Resilience Attributes By Four Weekly Components KEY COMPONENT – ART ACTIVITIES (Lesson Plans)

(1) Name Collages, (2) Completing name collages, (3) Prayer Flags, (4) Necklaces), (5) Butterflies,(6) Paper Chrysalis, (9) Funny animals (air dry clay using recycled objects to add texture, (10) Boxes w “vision” words (painting, writing), (12) Collaborative Accordion book (cutting, writing)

Attributes

Creativity

Optimism

Persistence

Resourcefulness

Sense of Community

A

Sense of

Humor

A Sense

of Literate

Self

A Sense of Personal

Accomplishment

Sense of Purpose

Vision for the future

Lesson Plan(s)

All 3, 10,12 All All All 9 1, 2,3, 4,10,

12

All 2,4, 10, 12

3,4,6, 10 12

KEY COMPONENT – STICKY NOTES (Lesson Plans)

(1) Write/Draw/Share your name or something you like about it”, (2) “Draw/Write something you like about your family or a family celebration, (3) “What is worth repeating?”, (4) “How can we share with others?”, (5) What helps you find balance in your life? (6) “Write/Draw an image which illustrates balance \ write about what helps to create balance”, (9) “Draw/Write about something funny”, (10) “What word do you want to use to shape your vision for yourself, your family, your community?”, (12) “Select an empowering word from those provided, write it on 2 sticky notes”

Attributes

Creativity

Optimism

Persistence

Resourcefulness

A Sense of Community

A

Sense of

Humor

A Sense

of Literate

Self

A

Sense of Personal

Accomplishment

A Sense of Purpose

Vision for the future

Lesson Plan(s)

All 2,3,4, 6, 9

All 9 All All 4,6 2,3, 4,5,10

KEY COMPONENT – INTERACTIVE READ ALOUDS (Lesson Plans) (1) You Can Make a Collage: A Very Simple How-to Book by Eric Carle, (2) Family Pictures/Cuadros de Familia by Carmen Lomas Garza, (3) Poke in the Eye: A collection of concrete poems by Paul Janeczko and Chris Raschka, (4) Pet Show! by Ezra Jack Keats, (5) Magnificent Monarchs by Linda Glaser, (6) Ish by Peter H. Reynolds, (9) Stand Back Said the Elephant, I’m going to Sneeze! By Patricia Thomas, (10) Wings by Christopher Myers, (12) Beautiful Oops! by Barney Saltzberg

Attributes

Creativity

Optimism

Persistence

Resourcefulness

A Sense of

Community

A

Sense of

Humor

A Sense

of Literate

Self

A

Sense of Personal

Accomplishment

A Sense of Purpose

Vision for the future

Lesson Plan(s)

All 2 All 9 All 5 4,6

KEY COMPONENT – CHECKING OUT BOOKS (Lesson Plans) Individual and family check out books from a wide collection of children's literature.

Attributes

Creativity

Optimism

Persistence

Resourcefulness

A Sense of

Community

A

Sense of

Humor

A Sense

of Literate

Self

A

Sense of Personal

Accomplishment

A Sense of Purpose

Vision for the future

Lesson

Plan(s) All All All All All

Table 3. Analysis of Resilience Attributes By Four Weekly Components

127

Reflections on Moore College of Art and Design’s Master’s Degree Program in Art Education with an

Emphasis in Special Populations

LYNNE HOROSCHAK, KIM GAVIN, AND VERONICA HICKS

This paper begins with a description of a unique graduate program in art education

developed by an experienced urban art educator. Moore College of Art & Design’s program

meshes with and contributes to the community. To illustrate this dynamic, the paper shifts,

both generationally and in tone, to two students in Moore’s program whose research addresses

concerns of teachers in today’s art classrooms. Kim Gavin describes the acquisition of language

and literacy skills by special education students and English language learners (ELL) in the art

room. Veronica Hicks writes about raising self-confidence in young women artists with special

needs through art.

Moore College of Art & Design in Philadelphia houses the only known master’s degree

program in visual art and special education. The program, MA in Art Education with an

Emphasis on Special Populations, serves as a model for preparing art teachers to work with

students with disabilities both in inclusive and self-contained settings. The 30-credit program

is built on the experience of Horoschak, who taught art to students with disabilities for over 30

years, and is designed to accommodate the working art teacher. The MA in Art Education with

an Emphasis in Special Populations schedule has two summer intensive terms on campus with

fall and spring terms on-line. The program can be completed in four terms.

Because art educators need to continually hone their skills as artists as well as

educators, a studio intensive experience is built into the first summer term, with a studio

provided to each graduate student. In addition to “Studio Intensives” in the first summer term,

courses include “Curriculum Development” and “Contemporary Issues in Art Education.”

“Curriculum Development” begins immediately with hands on experiential learning with both

children and adults with disabilities. Graduate students teach the individuals with disabilities

in dyads. Working in pairs encourages brainstorming of ideas and brings a level of support for

one another. Twice, they visit sites where children with disabilities learn. During the first visit,

128

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

they observe, ask questions, and take notes. During a follow-up visit, the graduate students

teach an art lesson relevant to the individual’s learning.

Adults with developmental disabilities come to the Galleries at Moore and the graduate

students walk them through the exhibitions asking relevant, open-ended questions to help

them explore the art. Examples of questions are “What do you see here?” “What colors are

in this painting?” “Which are your favorites?” Drawing in the air stimulates the creativity of

participants and engages them in the art they are seeing. Questions may need to be reworded

in a moment’s notice if a participant is having difficulty responding to the question. Following

the “Gallery Walk and Talk,” graduate students teach a lesson connected to art in the Gallery.

Artwork from the lesson is displayed and celebrated with high fives and applause.

During “Contemporary Issues,” students explore current educational practices through

academic articles and guest lecturers who are leaders in their fields of expertise. Topics such as

inclusion in a Philadelphia Public School art classroom, multicultural education with a focus on

art teaching, and art teaching and learning in a New York Community Center for low income

families are presented.

In the fall, the online courses are “Research Methodology” and “Technology for

Special Education.” During “Research Methodology,” the students develop their chosen thesis

question, conduct a literature review, and learn the methodology of Action Research (Mills,

Gay, & Airasian, 2011).

Action Research is any systematic inquiry conducted by teacher researchers, principals,

school counselors, or other stakeholders in the teaching/learning environment to gather

information about how their particular schools operate, how they teach, and how well

their students learn. This information is gathered with the goals of gaining insight, de-

veloping reflective practice, effecting positive changes in the school environment (and

on educational practices in general), and improving student outcomes and the lives of

those involved. Action Research is research done by teachers for themselves. (p. 5)

During “Independent Research for Thesis” in the spring semester, data is collected,

analyzed, and interpreted. Some students’ theses titles for the spring of 2014 are: The Element

of Choice: Choice-Based Art Education in a Functional Skills Classroom; The Effects of a

129

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

Community-based Art Curriculum on Students with Emotional and Behavioral Disturbance; A

Study of Culture and Identity through Art-Engaging Students with Emotional and Behavioral

Disorder; and Using Art to Encourage Student Voice and Critical Analysis at Harrington

Elementary School. “Assessment Strategies” is also taught during the spring semester.

Students develop strategies to evaluate the learning of a student with disabilities from a special

education teacher.

Three courses offered during the final summer term are “Legal Perspectives,” “Visual

Culture” and “Thesis.” “Legal Perspectives,” taught by a special education lawyer, helps

students understand legal aspects of the implementation of the Individuals with Disabilities

Education Act (IDEA), which pertains to all teachers of students with disabilities. “Visual

Culture” rounds out the summer courses. This graduate seminar examines the theoretical,

political, and aesthetic concerns that drive current trends in art, with a particular focus on art of

the global present. Topics include globalization, place, language, memory, identity, institutional

critique, and socially engaged art. Students in the “Thesis” class finish editing their theses

and prepare the public presentations of their research findings. Following the presentation,

an exhibition of the process of the graduates’ theses studies is on display in the Galleries at

Moore.

In 2014, we will graduate our fifth class with ten students. A number of our students

continue to contribute to the field of art and special education. Two of our alumni have been

accepted to five doctoral programs. Others have presented at Pennsylvania Art Education

Association conferences, 2012 and 2013, and at Intersections: Arts and Special Education

Conference at the Kennedy Center, 2013. Three alumni will present with Horoschak at the

Council for Exceptional Children national convention, 2014.

Kim Gavin and Veronica Hicks, two Moore alumni, describe their research theses below.

Gavin describes how language, literacy skills, and visual literacy in English Language Learners

and students with disabilities can be enhanced in the art room. Hicks’ research shows how art

education can raise the self-confidence of young women artists who have disabilities.

130

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

Language, Literacy Skills and Visual Literacy: A Study of the Acquisition of Lan-

guage and Literacy Skills by Special Education Students and English Language

Learners (ELL) Gained in the Art Room Education Classroom

As the United States’ population rapidly shifts and demographics in urban public

classrooms change, teachers are asked to teach students new to the English language (Shin

& Kaminski, 2010). Yet many of these students need to learn to speak, read, and write English

proficiently. Teachers are also asked to support and scaffold their lessons to accommodate

different learning styles and developmental levels of their special education students with

individualized education plans (IEP) (Batt, 2008). Both special education and English Language

Learners (ELL) students are minority students in a classroom, but their numbers are growing.

(Xu & Connelly, 2011). A data report from the Census Bureau for 2010, stated ‘Of the 53.9

million school aged children aged 5 to 17 about 2.8 million or 5.2 % were reported to have

a disability in 2010’ (Brault, 2011). According to the 2008 Census, 10.9 million school-aged

students (5-17) spoke a language other than English at home. Although each of these groups

of students requires different classroom supports, they often do not get the extra support they

need. Faced with the multiple challenges of teaching all students, general education teachers

struggle to reach every student.

Some educational programs use a “deficit model” to teach English language

learners (ELLs), in which the ELLs must catch up to the other students or they are viewed as

being “in need of” or lacking skills (Xu & Connelly, 2011). However, both ELL and special

education students bring skills to their general education classroom. They bring their personal

experiences, cultural traditions, and prior knowledge. In fact, students’ personal experiences

and skills are both encouraged and utilized in the art education classroom. These same

personal experiences and skills are often ignored or dismissed in the general education

classroom, especially in urban public schools serving students from low socio-economic

settings (SES) (Batt, 2008). This raises the question: How can students’ personal experiences

and skills be used to enhance the academic performance of special education and ELL students

in other content areas? One solution is to form partnerships among special education teachers,

131

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

teachers of ELL students and art teachers (Batt, 2008, Gerber, 2011). Art education can foster

thinking, learning, and communication skills.

ELL and Special Education Differences and Similarities

Research demonstrates that students take up to seven years to become fluent or

proficient in a new language (Krashen, 1998). Culturally responsive teachers can develop

relationships with students that are mutual and respectful, creating a safe environment, which

can aid learning and language acquisition. Stephen Krashen (1998), a renowned researcher in

language acquisition and second language learners, wrote:

The best methods are therefore those that supply ‘comprehensible input’ in low anxiety

situations, containing messages that students really want to hear. These methods do

not force early production in the second language, but allow students to produce when

they are ‘ready’, recognizing that improvement comes from supplying communicative

and comprehensible input, and not from forcing and correcting production. (pp. 6-7)

The art room is a safe space where different cultures and ideas can be explored,

expressed, and communicated in a variety of ways. Visual literacy skills acquired in the art

room can help students in decoding words and learning second language skills. There is much

research regarding the acquisition of language skills, yet researchers have overlooked the skills

acquired in the art room (Spina, 2006).

While the needs of special education students can differ from those of ELL students,

both groups benefit from teaching strategies used in the art education classroom. There are

times when the needs of both groups can overlap or be similar. Alternatively, the strengths

of one group can provide support for the other group; working together supports learning

and builds confidence in both groups. Similar to ELL students, special education students’

prior knowledge, personal experiences, and culture are not considered sources of strength or

success in a general education class (Xu & Connelly, 2011). General education teachers dread

having students with IEPs in their classroom, fearing that these students will greatly lower

their standardized test scores (Batt, 2008). Teachers are required to scaffold or break down

their lessons to fit the learning needs of their special education students (Batt, 2008). For

132

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

some schools, inclusion for students with IEPs means that students with learning disabilities

are included in special classes such as art and gym, but have separate self-contained general

education classrooms. Yet, the art and gym classes are places in which many special education

students excel. Their learning challenges are not considered a hindrance to their success in

such classes.

Classroom Strategies

Certain strategies, for example, translator or peer buddies and working in small groups,

used in the art education classroom aid both ELL and special education students in acquiring

literacy skills. The art education classroom is often where students work in small groups or in

pairs. For example, the teacher can pair one ELL student with a translator buddy, a student who

speaks both languages. Similarly, the teacher can pair a student with a speech and language

disability with a typically developing peer. This strategy allows students to work together to

learn at their own pace. The working pairs are able to build their understanding of the project

and to help each other solve problems as they arise. Xu and Connelly (2011) suggested:

Dewey saw intelligence as a social phenomenon in which knowing was socially con-

structed. For Dewey, the curious and creative minds are minds working interactively with

other minds to make meaning of social life, in effect, to intellectualize practice. Inquiry

requires minds that are social conditioned to challenge, inquire, solve problems, im-

prove matters, in short to change and reconstruct society. (p. 254)

The art education room provides a collaborative opportunity for students to “challenge,

inquire, solve problems, and improve matters” (Xu & Connelly, 2011). Research has shown the

importance of incorporating prior knowledge with new learning, which may involve connecting

new learning to the students’ first or second language in the case of ELL students (Coelho,

2003; Corson, 1999; Cummins, 1994, 2000, 2007).

My original research question was: How can acquisition of language and literacy skills

acquired through visual literacy in the art education classroom improve the performance of

special education and ELL students in general education classrooms? An action research

project was planned to gather data on this question. During the action research, I was the art

133

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

teacher. I collaborated with the fifth grade general education and special education teachers

in an elementary school to link the language arts units of themed stories or literacy blocks to

art projects, which were to be created in the art room during the same six weeks. A mixed

group of five students; one ELL student with an IEP and four special education students came

together to work on art projects based on the literacy unit. In this art education classroom

research, each student contributed his or her prior knowledge and personal experiences to the

interpretation of the project to be completed. The students then collaborated to solve design

problems based on themes and topics covered in the students’ fifth grade classroom.

I provided visual examples of completed projects or art history examples to give

students a visual understanding of the art or literacy unit block concept. Providing visual

examples allowed students who are visually motivated to become engaged and to gain an

entry point to understand the concept being taught. This strategy also allowed students who

are challenged by language barriers to overcome them by looking at the examples. The art

examples also provided a visual link to the literacy block skills in the general education class.

For example, the fifth grade students were studying wind power in their literacy unit. In the art

education classroom we looked at Hart Benton’s art, The Hailstorm. We compared information

from the students’ literacy unit and described how it related to the artwork. Then we created a

piece of artwork that focused on strong, powerful wind, such as tornadoes.

Alternative Assessments

Once a unit was completed, the art and special education teachers worked together

to use alternative forms of assessment to gauge students’ comprehension of the unit. Often

general education teachers rely on reading/writing style tests as the only form of student

assessment. If students are challenged by testing formats or have anxiety about reading or

writing, they are often unsuccessful. Students with fine motor skill problems or with poor writing

skills often emotionally shut down or disconnect from the project at the prospect of taking a

test or completing a worksheet. These tests do not capture a student’s full comprehension of a

subject or skill.

134

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

In the art education classroom, alternative forms of assessment are used to gauge a

student’s progress with a concept or subject. For example, teachers assess a student verbally

retelling a story, or allow students to illustrate their answers to verbal questions, using word

games with word banks, or gather their artwork into a portfolio to show progress on a topic.

These strategies showed a broader range of student understanding without the anxiety of

taking a test or struggling with a new language.

The data was gathered through observation and verbal assessments. The special

education teacher and I administered these alternative assessments to the students. All

assessments were conducted in the art room. This data showed that students were gaining

verbal literacy skills, using vocabulary from the language arts unit, and understanding and

retelling stories in the same language arts unit. Alternative ways to access learning and

comprehension were still required. Students’ slight gains in writing and reading showed their

struggle with writing, even when given simple prompts and word guides.

Within their artwork, words and ideas appeared without prompts or suggestions.

Students could verbally retell a story, convey an idea, or show understanding of directions.

Yet they continued to struggle with reading and writing words. During the ongoing interviews,

students expressed an appreciation of art and the fun they had during class time. However,

they showed concern when they were asked if literacy should be a part of art. Grimaces

showed on their faces when literacy was mentioned. When it was explained that they would still

be making art but that reading, art, writing, and vocabulary would be part of the projects, they

agreed it would be a good idea — as long as they did not have to write about it. They did not

realize the word puzzles and games they completed, or the words they wrote in their artwork

were also writing. The word puzzles were writing exercises without the stress and did not cause

an emotional shutdown in the students. There was a very different result when blank writing

worksheets were presented, even when word banks were provided. These worksheets caused

student stress and led to off-task behaviors.

Teachers used alternative assessment strategies for the special education and ELL

students to measure their comprehension of subject matter. While accommodations were made

for these students so that they would be able to achieve success, high standards were still

135

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

maintained for their work. Finally, according to observations made by the classroom and special

education teachers, students showed changes in their behavior and increased self-confidence

among their peers. They even began to take on leadership roles such as Boy Scout assistant or

school visitor escort in the school community.

Findings

This research showed that, through alternative ways of assessing - using the students’

own learning styles and kinesthetic learning, the students made some gains in the areas

of literacy and language. The students used vocabulary words and demonstrated them —

“design,” “connect,” “apply concepts,” and “create”- which are words that encompass the

fourth level of Webb’s Depth of Knowledge chart — extended thinking (Webb, 2005). They

showed in the art making and writing process their ability to connect the literacy block units

and the art projects that used these concepts. The most surprising area of improvement

occurred in areas of behavior. The students’ behaviors changed. They matured and showed

initiative in settings outside of the art classroom.

The research demonstrated that special education and ELL students’ kinesthetic

understanding and skills, which are encouraged and supported in the art education classroom,

can be used to enhance the language acquisition and literacy skills of these students. By

fostering successes in the art room, that confidence can be transferred with positive results

into other educational settings. This study has shown promising results and suggests that more

research is needed in the area of art education, literacy, and language building.

Young Women Artists with Special Needs: Raising Self-Confidence Through Art

Having a poor self-concept can lower one’s capabilities and inhibit the ability to achieve.

A student’s self-concept can suffer when educational and social goals appear unattainable

(Lackaye, Margalit, Ziv, & Ziman, 2006). Even the young learner with disabilities who is taught in

the least restrictive environment may become agitated, infuriated, or feel isolated.

In contrast, providing the child with opportunities for mastery experiences in the art

classroom gives both meaningful connections and encourages growth of the student’s self-

efficacy. Ancis and Phillips defined argentic self-efficacy as an individual’s beliefs about her

136

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

ability to successfully engage in educational and career facilitative behaviors (1996). It plays

a key role in whether or not individuals would attempt to engage in career relevant behavior

(Ancis & Phillips, 1996). Building on this belief, self-efficacy judgment is derived from four

principal sources of information: 1) personal performance accomplishments, or mastery

experiences; 2) vicarious learning; 3) verbal persuasion; and 4) emotional arousal (Bandura,

1977, 1986). These sources were employed to develop a strong foundation of self-efficacy in

this action research study to raise female art student’s levels of self-confidence.

Fewer female students are identified as having a disability as male students, however

their needs for supports to be successful are great. Female students have been known to have

lower levels of self-efficacy compared to male students, and the additional stress of having a

disability could make educational or professional aspirations seem beyond their reach (Rayle,

Arredondo, & Robinson Kurpius, 2005; Reisberg, 2000). Self-efficacy development, through art-

making experiences for female students with disabilities, allows the arts to be a key to healthy

levels of self-confidence.

Goals of the Study

This action research study took place in a foster care organization located in the central

part of New Jersey. The organization incorporates a diversity of afterschool activities for foster

children who receive school-based services. After meeting with children spanning a variety of

ages, I chose to focus on a group of 6th to 8th grade girls from diverse ethnic backgrounds who

attended the same inner city middle school. I created an afterschool art club that we named

Art4Girls, or Art4G. The Art4G club members included female students with special needs

who possessed a high level of interest in art. We met after school every Friday and several

Wednesdays for three months during the data collection time period of the study.

These young women, recipients of free foster care services, had a range of abilities and

confidence levels. They were the participants in this action research about raising the self-

confidence levels of young women artists with special needs through art-making. The research

question that shaped the study was: How can developing art-making skills promote self-efficacy

in female students with special needs?

137

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

This particular group of 12 participants represented three separate populations known

to have high levels of self-doubt. The first population identified with low self-efficacy levels was

school-aged children. As outlined by Bandura (1977), beliefs of confidence and doubt develop

in childhood as children experienced varying tasks and situations. Focusing on adolescents

could potentially yield favorable results toward raising self-efficacy because they have

previously had art-making tasks in a school setting.

A second population identified with high levels of self-doubt was students who have

been labeled with special needs or disabilities. Learning Disabled (LD) and non-LD peers who

were equally matched in academics reported that students with LD had lower levels of hope

(Lackaye et al., 2006). This report of efficacy relating to students with disabilities was a central

concern before choosing this study. My goal was to make an impact on this statistic in the

future.

The third identified population was female students. A literature review confirmed that

male students had levels of self-efficacy that exceeded the levels of self-efficacy reported by

female students at the same academic level. Women have reported lower educational self-

efficacy, experience higher academic stress, and often perceive less support for education

(Rayle et al., 2005). Furthering the research of building self-efficacy in young women by

supplying them with activities that support positive beliefs may better prepare them with a

defense for gender biased situations.

Curriculum Plan

Students representing these three populations arrived at Art4G, excited to improve

their art skills. The goal of the club was to elevate their levels of self-efficacy through

constructive art experiences. Reflecting on their abilities, students were asked to think about

what they could accomplish and focus on: “What can I,” instead of focusing on self-worth,

“What am I” (Lackaye et al., 2006).

The curriculum designed for Art4G included one unit plan with two lessons that focused

on art-making skills that interested these middle school girls. The first group meeting consisted

of the participants filling out a survey about the art-making skills they were interested in

138

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

improving. This survey also featured questions about the students’ levels of self-confidence and

levels of self-doubt. For example, one question asked the participants to recall moments inside

and outside of school in which they felt confident or doubtful in their abilities.

After reading the students’ surveys, the initial unit plan was altered to reflect the

girls’ interests and presented to the Art4G club members. The girls agreed they liked the

content and wanted to participate in the lessons. Our discussion also gave the club members

the authority to reject or accept the revised unit plan proposal. This process created group

camaraderie among members through their decision-making. Allowing the students a choice

of content demonstrated a respect towards student ideas. The art room became a space where

the participants believed their voices would be heard.

The first lesson in the unit plan was the “Apple Time” lesson. It focused on realistic

drawing skills, the incorporation of shading techniques, and drawing from observation. This

lesson involved setting an apple in front of the student. The student observed the apple and

then drew it. Once an initial drawing was made, the student was encouraged to bite the apple

and then draw it a second time. A third drawing would focus on what was left of the apple after

the student finished eating it - the apple core.

The second lesson was called the “Hair Self-Portrait” lesson. It focused on realistic facial

features, the incorporation of fantasy and pattern design, and drawing/painting techniques.

This lesson was introduced by reading the book, I Love My Hair! by Natasha Anastasia Tarpley

(1998), illustrated by E. B. Lewis. It tells the story of a young black girl who is frustrated by her

hair. As she sits in between her mother’s legs, it is explained to her that her hair is capable of

being worn in many styles and is a part of her African-American heritage. The young girl learns

that her hair is a blessing, and in turn, she comes to love her hair. Students shared their own

hair stories, identified facial features that they wanted to include in their own large scale self-

portraits, and created patterns to include in the overlapping lines in their hair drawings.

Each lesson featured examples of famous artworks made by female artists and by

student artists in their age range. The examples used in the unit plan reflected people

from different cultural heritages, along with equally diverse abilities. The participants were

139

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

deliberately exposed to these examples with the intention that they would see a part of

themselves in the art, validating themselves and their beliefs of achieving great results in their

art by practicing their techniques in a supportive educational environment.

Raising Self-Efficacy

The four sources to raise self-efficacy were involved in the Art4G teaching methods: (1)

personal performance accomplishments; (2) vicarious learning; (3) verbal persuasion; and (4)

emotional arousal (Bandura, 1977, 1986). These were incorporated into every class session.

Personal performance accomplishments, also known as mastery experiences, can be

in the form of small achievements (e.g., drawing an oval for a face shape needing hand-over-

hand assistance) and in the completion of modest goals (e.g., drawing an oval for a face shape

without assistance). The final project would be completed through art making techniques that

the participants initially did not possess. Students practiced and gained the skills needed to

complete the project in ascending stages that built upon each other. This allowed each student

to focus on the one skill needed to complete a project and practice it until mastering the

technique.

Vicarious learning experiences, the process of learning from observing another person’s

behavior, were included in the class sessions. Art teachers can demonstrate a skill before asking

a student to attempt the technique, implying that if I can do this, so can you! The intention

for vicarious learning in this study was for the student to internalize the art teacher’s attempt

at implementing a skill as a success that they can do themselves. Moreover, if a fellow student

demonstrates a skill, this may trigger a stronger internalization for student observers. Asking

a student to demonstrate the skill in front of his or her peers can raise the student’s level of

anxiety to perform well, but the benefits of completing that task successfully greatly outweigh

the chance of failure.

Next, verbal persuasion was used during the class sessions. Verbal persuasion is when

an individual is motivated by others to complete a task. This includes encouragement, saying

out loud to the participant “I know you can do this. Keep up the good work. You are doing a

great job on your project.”

140

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

Lastly, the fourth source of raising self-efficacy that was used during the art sessions was

emotional arousal. Controlling the environment to intentionally impact emotional arousal can

minimize stressors by creating a comfortable location in which to work. A high priority in this

study is keeping the classroom environment relaxing, so students are physically and mentally

comfortable. Developing the classroom into a place where the students would feel at ease

after a long week of being in middle school took effort but was worth it. Students knew, after

entering the art room, they would be respected and listened to, and never teased for their

ideas or questions.

Classroom Adaptations

Adaptations for students with special needs were woven seamlessly into the afterschool

classroom experience and did not bring attention to varying ability levels. Often a typically

developing student would enter the art club classroom and not notice that these adaptations

were in place. For example, directions were written on the dry erase or interactive white board

in clearly legible font and were located at the front of the classroom. Often black letters were

printed on a white background, while on another screen white letters would be displayed on

a black background. Those who preferred to view that screen found the directions easier to

read with that color arrangement. A second set of directions were taped to the students’ desks

for immediate reference. This allowed students to follow along as the art teacher read the

directions out loud and so students could read them later at their own pace. This technique

was very helpful for students who had visual difficulties. They could get as close to the

directions on their desk as they needed to for reading. Students with attention difficulties also

found them convenient. They could check the task they needed to complete without having

to raise their hand or ask the teacher for assistance. Students who were shy also found the

directions taped to their desks helpful. They did not have to single themselves out by walking

to the front of the classroom and asking for directions. Participants with hearing disabilities

were seated closer to the teacher for a better hearing range or to lip-read.

The pathways in the Art4G classroom were made wider during afterschool hours, and

sinks could be operated from a seated position for students with mobility devices. Materials for

141

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

projects were stored on low shelves in containers that were uniquely shaped for identification

by touch and sight. Students with low vision were able to use these secondary ways of

identification without attention being called to their disability.

One other key technique incorporated during all class sessions was to include small,

calculated risk-taking opportunities. Small but meaningful risk-taking activities were arranged

for the participants to experience with the expectation that they would gain higher self-efficacy

levels because of their successful participation. Risk-taking activities included having a student

demonstrate a skill that had some chance of failure in front of their peers. They also included

setting the objectives to the final projects just outside students’ comfort zones and initial skill

sets. Involving the students in these risky tasks provided them with a greater appreciation for

rising to the challenge when unsure of their abilities. Using the strategy of appropriate risk-

taking activities relating to art making skills improved the student’s self-confidence during this

study.

Data Collection and Findings

Four different types of data were collected to understand trends happening in the

art classroom with this group of participants labeled with disabilities. Teacher participant

observation forms were created for this study to be completed during class time, once a

month for three months. All participants were studied for a minimum of two observation

periods during the course of the study to note and compare changes in their behavior.

Teacher observations indicated that all four sources of raising self-efficacy were incorporated

during each observed class session. All observed class sessions involved appropriate risk-

taking moments such as student demonstrations or trying out a new art skill. Every class

session integrated the classroom adaptations for students with special needs without negative

attention or embarrassment.

Written surveys were handed out in the beginning of a class session and filled out by

participants. The written surveys allowed students to express thoughts privately to the art

teacher. These surveys were completed once a month for three months with a final survey

during the last session of the third month. The students’ initial written surveys showed that they

142

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

possessed a strong desire to improve their art skills. The initial survey revealed their elevated

concerns about failing at a task in front of their peers, both inside and outside of the school

setting (e.g., “I suck at drawing anything but little cartoons.” “I just plain freak out.”).

The student surveys helped assess their levels of self-confidence throughout the study.

The surveys collected at the culmination of the study showed that 75% of students’ levels of

self-confidence rose from moderate to high levels, and that 25% of students maintained high

levels of self-confidence during the study. Thus, all of the students in the study maintained or

increased self-confidence levels.

Teachers conducted focus group interviews with the students during the three-

month study, taking place twice a month. Interviews were documented with audio and video

recordings and transcribed. Student participants shared their strategies of handling stressful

situations with each other. The students initiated generating a list of strategies to handle high-

stress situations. Their list included the following: focusing on a person who makes them feel

at ease; redirecting their attention by doing or thinking of other things; and remembering

their best qualities. Focus group interviews revealed that student participants were mainly

concerned about performing tasks without failing, especially in front of large groups of peers.

The students created artifacts during the art club sessions (see Figure 1), which included

gesture drawings, practice still life sketches, shading and facial feature exercises, and final

Apple Time and Hair Self-Portrait projects. Students were given a sketchbook and instructional

worksheets for practicing art techniques during Art4G class time and for home use. Their

artifacts were photographed during various stages of completion.

The collection of students’ artifacts showed a development of improved art skills

as seen by the growth in participant Lauren’s portrait progression. Lauren was labeled with

cognitive disability and experienced mobility issues, but that did not keep her from drawing

her initial self-portrait. After several sessions of sketching human facial features she started to

reference the techniques used in class to align the features on an oval for a head, and soon

after added a neck and shoulders to her drawing. With more drawing practice, she moved on

to drawing on large 18x24 inch paper to start her final project. Carefully noting her reflection in

143

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

a mirror, Lauren added her features to the portrait, along with a crayon resist before applying

watercolor paint to her hair.

After three months, the students’ artwork was submitted for display at a local gallery.

The students received public recognition for their efforts by having their own art exhibit,

complete with a gallery opening with food, family, and friends. The students were asked to

stand in front of their artwork and to reflect on seeing their art projects on display in this formal

venue. Some of the student responses included the following:

“It means that I was that good to have it displayed for a lot of people to see. I must

have some talent if my art is going to gallery.”

“It means a lot to me because I really love drawing and painting and when people

say nice stuff and complement it makes me happy and excited which, inspires me to

draw more.”

Participants completed the final written survey at the art show. The students rated their

self-confidence levels before joining Art4G and their levels of self-confidence after completing

the action research project. Every student participant rated his or her level of self-confidence

at five out of five points, the highest score on the scale. All student participants indicated that

they maintained or gained self-confidence by being a participant in this action research project.

Conclusion

Strategies from this action research study provide chances to build a healthy self-

confidence level for students. Including the four sources of raising self-efficacy (providing

personal performance accomplishments, vicarious learning, verbal persuasion and emotional

arousal) can be executed at any stage during the class period. Small calculated risk-taking

opportunities for students may cause some uncertainty at first, but with the successful

completion of these opportunities the students’ self-efficacy level will surely skyrocket. Lastly,

incorporating adaptations and making a classroom as accessible as possible for students with

disabilities not only helps them complete class routines, but may help typically developing

students as well.

144

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

References

Ancis, J. R., & Phillips, S. D. (1996). Academic Gender Bias and Women’s Behavioral Agency

Self-Efficacy. Journal Of Counseling & Development, 75(2), 131-137.

Bandura, A. (1977). Self-efficacy: Toward a unifying theory of behavioral change. Psychological

Review, 84 (2), 191-215.

Bandura, A. (1986). Human agency in social cognitive theory. American Psychologist, 44 (9),

1175-1184.

Batt, E. (2008). Teacher’s Perceptions of ELL Education: Potential Solutions to Overcome the

Greatest Challenges. Multicultural Education, Spring.

Brault, M. (2011). School-aged children with disabilities in U.S. metropolitan statistical areas:

2010. American Community Survey Briefs. 11(2011). Washington, DC: U.S. Census

Bureau.

Coelho, E. (2003). Adding English: A guide to teaching in multilingual classrooms. Toronto,

Canada: Pippin.

Corson, D. (1999). Language policy in schools: a resource for teachers and administrators.

Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

Cummins, J. (1994). Knowledge, power, and identity in teaching English as a second language.

In F. Genesee (Ed). Educating second language children (pp 33-58). Cambridge, UK:

Cambridge University Press.

Cummins, J. (2000). Language, power, and pedagogy: Bilingual children in the crossfire.

Clevedon, UK: Multilingual Matters.

Cummins, J. (2007). Promoting literacy in multilingual contexts. What Works? Research Inn.

Ontario, Canada: The Literacy and Numeracy Secretariat and the Ontario Association of

Deans of Education.

Gerber, B. L. (2011). 2011 Lowenfeld Award Lecture. Art education and special education: A

promising partnership. Retrieved from www.arteducators.org

Krashen, S. D. (1998) Second Language Acquisition and Second Language Learning. Prentice

Hall International.

145

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

Lackaye, T., Margalit, M., Ziv, O., & Ziman, T. (2006). Comparisons of self-efficacy, mood,

effort, and hope between students with learning disabilities and their non-LD-matched

peers. Learning Disabilities Research & Practice, 21(2), 111-121. doi:10.1111/j.1540-

5826.2006.00211.x

Mills, G. E., Gay, L.R., & Airasian, P.W. (2011). Competencies for analysis and applications.

Educational Research, 10, 79-98.

Rayle, A., Arredondo, P., & Robinson Kurpius, S. E. (2005). Educational self-efficacy of

collegewomen: Implications for theory, research, and practice. Journal of Counseling &

Development, 83(3), 361-366.

Reisberg, L. (2000). Student stress is rising, especially among women. Chronicle Of Higher

Education, 46(21), A49.

Shin, H., & Kominski, R. (2010). Language use in the United States. American Community

Survey Reports. 4(2010), ACS-12. Washington, DC: U.S. Census Bureau.

Spina, S. (2006). Worlds Apart…Words Apart: An Assessment of the Effectiveness of Arts Based

Curriculum for Second Language Learners. Journal of Latinos and Educators, 5(2), pp.

99-122.

Tarpley, N. & Lewis, E. (1998). I love my hair. Boston: Little, Brown.

Webb, N. (2005). Web Alignment Tool. Wisconsin Center for Educational Research. University

of Wisconsin-Madison, 2, Feb. 2006. www.wcer.wisc.edu/WAT/index.aspx.

Xu, S., & Connelly, F. (2011). On the need for curious and creative minds in multicultural and

cross-cultural educational settings, narrative possibilities. Cultivating Curious and

Creative Minds, the Role of Teacher and Teacher Educators: Part I Teacher Education

Yearbook XVIII. Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield Education.

146

MOORE COLLEGE OF ART AND DESIGN’S UNIQUE MASTER’S PROGRAM

Figure 1Examples of Art4G Participant Lauren’s Self-Portrait Progression

147

IDEA Empowerment Through Difference Find Card Strategies

Communitarian Approaches to Empowerment

KAREN KEIFER-BOYD AND L. MICHELLE KRAFT

In educating all students toward full participation in a democratic society, the concept of

empowerment through difference sits at the core of the Individuals with Disabilities Education

Act (IDEA, 2004), as it does with all examples of civil rights legislation. Consequently, an art

education that fosters democratic values should empower students to

act on their visual environments in ways that reflect their beliefs and values . . .

[by examining] critically the larger systems that encompass their lives—belief systems,

patterns of thought, representations of self—that are directly related to the pervasive

influx of visual imagery that tells them what to believe, how to think, how to be. (Keif-

er-Boyd & Maitland-Gholson, 2007, p. 17)

Such empowerment and critical reflection, then, occurs through interaction and dialogue

with others within the community, especially with those who are different from oneself. In

this way, the inclusive art class community becomes more dynamic, more democratic, and

its participants are more mutually invested as they are able to value the diversity of all of

its members, regardless of (dis)ability. Art educator Kerry Freedman (2003) noted that the

communal aspect of education is among its most important principles; and this principle, and

its promise of mutual empowerment, becomes the driving force behind inclusive art education.

Moreover, “the definition of disability under disability discrimination law accounts for the

relational components of individuals’ lives, a matter of central importance to both feminist

theory and to communitarian theory,” and we argue of central importance to an education of

empowerment that is inclusive of difference (Ball, 2005, p. 108).

In this paper, we consider access to education in the visual arts, along with

participatory student engagement in the inclusive art class, as ways of creating an empowered

citizenry. We begin by examining the communitarian paradigm as reflected in the IDEA;

we then contextualize those findings to the site of the inclusive art class, and a practice of

148

EMPOWERMENT THROUGH DIFFERENCE

empowerment through difference. This practice involves sustained interaction with each other,

which is promoted through communicative art expression in which each learns to identify

strengths and capacities in others.

We discuss, with examples from our teaching, how the process of creating and

using Find Cards can empower by difference. Understanding that communitarian inclusion

encompasses more than one’s physical placement within a setting, we share the Find Card

strategy as a model of differentiated, integrated curriculum and assessment. We share

our experiences in using Find Cards, which are adaptable to, and thereby provide for full

participation of, learners experiencing a wide range of (dis)abilities (including “moderate

to severe,” and “gifted-and-talented”). This approach provides for stakeholder agency and

interdependence that promotes collaboration, autonomy, and respect for difference.

Participatory Community: The Communitarian Perspective

Communitarian theory provides the context for a fully participatory, inclusive art

classroom. Rather than viewing some community members as independent and others

dependent, this perspective argues that all are interdependent; and all stakeholders have

contributions to make to the community, despite our (dis)abilities (Ball, 2005; Kraft & Keifer-

Boyd, 2013; Turnbull, 1991). “Communitarian theory, like feminist theory, emphasizes

the importance of participation, dialogue, and communication” (Ball, 2005, p. 125). A

communitarian approach to inclusion in the art classroom respects and finds value in

all humanity; it emphasizes the duty of all participants to maximize strengths and build

proficiencies in one another for the benefit of the group.

Rutherford Turnbull (1991) contrasted the communitarian paradigm with the notion of

individualistic utilitarianism. He pointed out that the latter focuses on the individual self rather

than one’s responsibility toward others and presents specific problems for those experiencing

disabilities. Under the communitarian perspective, however, equality is not an absolute, nor is

it compensation to make up for one’s perceived shortcomings resultant from a disability (Kraft

& Keifer-Boyd, 2013). Rather, one’s access is relative to individual need with the recognition

that inclusion of all benefits the community as a whole, and this can only truly occur through full

149

EMPOWERMENT THROUGH DIFFERENCE

participation. “The statutory definition of disability under the ADA [Americans with Disability

Act] does not assess the functional limitations of individuals by analytically separating them

from others; instead, it focuses on relationships among individuals and between individuals and

their environments (Ball, 2005, p. 134). Thus, we see a communitarian paradigm, toward the

empowerment of all, reflected in the IDEA (2004) and in its accompanying federal regulations

(IDEA Regulations, 34 C.F.R., 2006).

IDEA as Communitarian

The IDEA (2004) delineates its expectation of participation of all citizens, including

those experiencing disabilities, as a goal of education, declaring:

Disability is a natural part of the human experience and in no way diminishes the right

of individuals to participate in or contribute to society. Improving educational results for

children with disabilities is an essential element of our national policy of ensuring equal-

ity of opportunity, full participation, independent living, and economic self-sufficiency

for individuals with disabilities. (20 U.S.C. § 1400)

Likewise, the Least Restrictive Environment (LRE) clause within the IDEA mandate holds the

presumption that students experiencing disabilities will be educated alongside their “non-

disabled” peers to the maximum extent appropriate. They will only be taught outside of the

general classroom environment when their educational requirements cannot be addressed

there (U.S.C. 20 § 1412 (a)(5)(A)).

We believe that rather than merely aspiring to accommodate difference we should

recognize that we are empowered by difference. In the art class as a communitarian LRE, con-

tinual interaction among participants is encouraged through communicative art expression so

that each recognizes strengths of the others. These different capacities, once identified, can

be skillfully supported so that they may contribute to the goals of the class-as-community. We

advocate this communitarian paradigm, therefore, in that it views all students as capable and

worthwhile contributors to the class environment (Kraft & Keifer-Boyd, 2013). The community

benefits from the valued differences among its members.

150

EMPOWERMENT THROUGH DIFFERENCE

Empowerment Through Difference

At the heart of a communitarian worldview is the concept empowerment through

difference, which is to be enabled to make choices regarding work and learning, to take

responsibility for those choices, and to actively participate with a community of learners in an

educative process in a safe and enriching environment. Empowerment through difference is to

counteract “exclusion, marginalization, and circumscribed opportunities” (Patterson, 2010, p.

150). The implementation of empowerment through difference is evident in a communitarian

educational process when each individual has the opportunity to contribute, with the

understanding that, in an interdependent community, everyone has contributions to make. This

inclusive, communitarian perspective of empowerment through difference corresponds with the

purposes and intent of the IDEA Federal Regulations.

Communitarian approaches to difference empower groups to change, challenge, or

disrupt barriers that deny equity for all to thrive and achieve in a world free from oppression.

Classroom practices that work to empower-through-difference are thereby able to challenge

normative constraints that create oppression; consequently, educators who engage in these

practices create allied partnerships and build community toward social justice for all (Erevelles

& Kafer, 2010; see also Wexler, 2009).

Difference is a collective act to dismantle constructions of cultural norms. New media

theorist N. Katherine Hayles (1999) referred to inscriptions as the societal scripts of normalcy,

which seem insurmountable obstacles to lived experiences. “The body is never a single

physical thing so much as a series of attitudes toward it” (Davis, 2002, p. 22). The Moving

Mountains film (Keifer-Boyd, Knight, Knochel, Liao, Meier, Patton, Shin, & Sweeny,

2013) along with films such as Profoundly Normal (Alley, Goldberger, & Robinson, 2003) can

set the stage for collaborative projects to create art that questions assumptions of normalcy.

The film Profoundly Normal (2003) is about the desire to be deeply normal and fear of being

abnormal. What would the world be like if there was no normal, no dichotomous state of

being, but instead difference is celebrated? Our bodies are as circumscribed and weighted

down as much with the discursive as with the material physicality like the seemingly solid state

of a rock-hard mountain. Exclusion, prejudice, marginalization, discrimination, and oppression

151

EMPOWERMENT THROUGH DIFFERENCE

would no longer have a foothold within the seemingly insurmountable mountain of inscriptions

of cultural norms.

Science philosopher Karen Barad (2003, 2007) developed the concept of diffraction

as a methodological lens that looks for bends and curves around obstacles of cultural notions

of normal as sites of agency. These agential bends involve joining with others, not as streams

feeding and deepening cultural norms but performatively “moving away from the familiar

habits and seductions of representation (reflecting on the world from outside) to a way of

understanding the world from within and as part of it” (Barad, 2007, p. 88). A communitarian

perspective empowered through difference is inclusive because notions of cultural norms are

questioned and difference is a way of belonging to and understanding the world.

Differentiated Assessment Toward the Education of All

The quality of reciprocity separates training from education. Training is a one-way street

wherein the teacher, in a banking model, deposits information into the minds of the learners

(Draves, 2000; Freire, 1990). Transformative education, on the other hand, empowers through

difference. It requires contribution from and interaction between all learners and the teacher;

all share with and learn from one another, that is, a form of leadership that is distributed among

all participants.

The inclusive communitarian art classroom, then, empowers through difference

using curriculum, instruction, and assessment that reflects transformative education.

Feminist pedagogical principles align with communitarian theory, and provide strategies for

transformative education within the context of the inclusive art classroom. Renowned feminist

artist, scholar, and educator, Judy Chicago (2012) described: “Feminist art education begins

with each person’s individual voice and builds both individual and collaborative art-making

out of those issues expressed by many different voices” (p. 115). Moreover, “what disability

discrimination law demands is something much closer to the understanding of equality held

by feminist theory, one sensitive and attuned to issues of difference” (Ball, 2005, p. 142). The

problem, however, is that schools have historically focused on analyzing student outcomes

through quantifiable measures, especially through emphasis on standardized testing. This

152

EMPOWERMENT THROUGH DIFFERENCE

standardized model of educational efficiency (which originated in the Industrial Revolution

and is based in human capital theories of economics) requires that “all students [regardless

of (dis)ability] are expected to master the same objectives, in a similar time frame, under

ostensibly uniform conditions, regardless of individual interests or capacity, learning needs,

personal circumstances or choice” (Wilson & Wright, 1994, p. 227; see also Kraft, 2006; and

Kraft & Keifer-Boyd, 2013). Assessment should allow for multi-modal ways of communicating

knowledge to better allow for inclusion in the art class. For example, a student-learning

objective that states, “The student will discuss the process for selection of work to include in a

portfolio,” does not allow for students whose primary mode of communication is not through

verbalization. Simply changing the wording from discuss to share, however, would be a more

appropriate assessment for all learners.

The post-Industrial Revolution models of educational efficiency and assessment are in

opposition to the communitarian perspective and, we believe, the philosophical underpinnings

of the IDEA. This cost-benefit approach to educational efficiency is mitigated somewhat by

the individualized educational requirements of special education law. Nevertheless, we still see

echoes of this system of educational efficiency within No Child Left Behind (NCLB, 2001)—to

which the IDEA is tied—as well as through states’ individual standardized testing practices,

which include students experiencing disabilities without necessarily accommodating their

needs.

The communitarian approach to educational efficiency, or productivity, is based in

empowerment through difference by way of one’s ability to contribute to the community;

and it also recognizes that community stakeholders may offer contributions that transcend

economics (Keifer-Boyd & Kraft, 2003; Kraft & Keifer-Boyd, 2013; Turnbull, 1991). Find-

Cards, as a differentiated assessment strategy, provides for opportunities to evaluate student

understanding of art and art making in a way that is empowering, individuated, communal, and

that encourages agency through one’s ability to contribute.

Find Cards as Differentiated Assessment

Find Cards is a differential assessment strategy that Keifer-Boyd developed in the 1970s

for teaching mixed age groups from five year olds to elders in a museum setting. The cards ask

153

EMPOWERMENT THROUGH DIFFERENCE

the cardholder to work with at least one other person to find what is described on the card. A

Find Card begins with a directive or clue of something to find in an exhibition and includes a

question. For example:

Find an artwork that presents a way of knowing the world that differs from what you are

familiar. What is the worldview and how is it conveyed?

Find an artwork that conveys ideas important to you.

What are the ideas and how are they communicated?

Find a work of art that is based on a narrative. What is the narrative?

Find Cards can be developed and modified according to curricular goals and learning

differences. Nicole Taylor and John Chacksfield (2005), information communication technology

educators specializing in learners with disabilities, advocate that educators need to “create

appropriately different learning experiences for mixed ability learners within a curriculum” (p.

14). A Find Card activity elicits a sense of student agency in selecting artworks, and yet focuses

a student team’s search and discussion in an open-ended translation of curricular content from

the combined strengths of the team. Teaching, learning, and assessment are integrated in Find

Card strategies. Find Cards increase active engagement through relevancy to learning about

what students find interesting. Moreover, Find Cards can be modified without diminishing

learning goals.

When students create Find Cards, teachers discern what students find important. Also,

in composing a question, reflection on what is learned integrates assessment with learning.

Teachers can assess the Find Cards as evidence of what students understand from the art

lessons. Students’ Find Cards are not confined to answers the teacher might expect, yet in the

assessment of understandings as expressed in the student-created Find Cards, teachers can

reteach for better understanding of art lesson goals. Below are examples of student-generated

find cards:

1. Find an artwork that is abstract. What are the qualities of this work that make it

abstract? Are these similar to qualities of the Abstract Expressionist paintings we have

studied this semester?

154

EMPOWERMENT THROUGH DIFFERENCE

2. Find an artwork that could stimulate the senses and impact the way people respond to

an issue. How are viewers’ emotions stimulated with this work?

3. Find an artwork that is directed to a specific audience. What audience does the work

speak to, and what is it communicating?

4. Find an artwork that uses symbols that are not cliché and yet would be understood by

many people. Who would understand these symbols? What is your interpretation of the

symbols?

Find Cards and Virtual World Exhibition

Find Card strategies are suitable for both physical and virtual sites. We use the potential

of virtual worlds for connectivity but also resist, in our use of technology, a detachment from

the physical world. We instead use the technology with its simulation and network capacities

to engage in the world. With opportunities to exhibit art in virtual worlds, students can curate,

invite guests from afar, and create Find Cards for their exhibitions. Pre-service teachers are

learning to do this in our courses using Virtual Immersive Educational World (VIEW), a virtual

environment for educational use only, designed particularly for K-12 educators.1

There can be a real-time exhibition opening that is accessible for all, regardless of

mobility or distance, through virtual worlds, either simultaneously or over time. Teams can

select a Find Card and an artwork as the focus of investigation. With a program such as

VoiceThread®, students can speak using the “comment” button and their voices are recorded.

They can collaborate with a peer using voice-synthesizing computer-generated simulation

of human speech, or they can type their comments. VoiceThread® offers multi-modal ways

to explore an artwork, photograph, or other type of image uploaded for online access. The

program’s functionality provides ways to zoom into different parts of an image and to have an

audio description accompanying the image. Additionally, Voice Thread®’s capability to make

marks on an image is similar to a built-in pointer, or a way to emphasize and direct attention,

particularly as the mark-making is recorded and corresponds to the audio.

1 An example from Keifer-Boyd’s Spring 2013 course that is available to try with students is at http://cyberhouse.arted.psu.edu/322/projects/3c_tdvt2013.html. It is open to all ages with no exhibition closing date. Instructions to enter the virtual world as an avatar are linked on the website. There are also options to see, hear, or read about the artworks, and alternative ways to comment on the work.

155

EMPOWERMENT THROUGH DIFFERENCE

The VoiceThread® tool for Find Cards provides multi-modal approaches to share and

assess understandings. “Though VoiceThread® will not address the learning needs of every

student in every situation, its interface and feature set are well-suited for promoting student

engagement and motivation as well as for helping students develop as independent learners”

(Brunvand & Byr, 2011, p. 30). When many respond to a prompt or find card question for a

work of art, VoiceThread® generates small icons surrounding the artwork to differentiate each

of those responses. Permissions can be set for groups or the public to hear as many responses

as have been recorded. Thus, a communitarian perspective can be achieved when different

views are expressed, recorded, revisited, reflected upon, and responded to in dialogue

surrounding an artwork.

Building Community for Inclusive Art Education

The adaptability of Find Cards allows for the facilitation of dialogue among arts

education disciplines. For example, in our session at the VSA Intersections: Arts and Special

Education Conference at The John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts in August 2013,

we asked participants to create Find Cards, in part, because we have found that experiential

education provides insights that didactic education cannot. Additionally, the strategy quickly

appraises what is important to a community of practice, and offers a resource of research

directions and needs assessment, in this case identifying gaps between current conditions and

desired intersections of art and special education.

We asked participants to reflect on the conference sessions they attended or even

select from ones not attended but listed in the program, to create a Find Card that begins with

the sentence, “Find a session that . . .” (fill in the blank here). We instructed participants to

follow the directive to discover by posing an open-ended question about a session, one that

would allow responders to share what they have learned, or what has impacted them. Below

are examples of the Find Cards produced at the Intersections conference.2

1. Find a presentation that gave you a new perspective on how you view student(s)

capacity for artistic growth? How will you use that new perspective?

2 For a full list of the Intersection Conference Find Cards responses see http://cyberhouse.arted.psu.edu/inclusion/Intersection_Conference_Find_Cards.

156

EMPOWERMENT THROUGH DIFFERENCE

2. Find a session in which Universal Design for Learning was a topic of discussion. What

new ways of presenting or providing information did you like or wish to try?

3. Find a session that deals with music education tools. How can you use these tools

to enhance student learning? How would student learning be different if visual

representations of notation were not available?

4. Find a session that used a story along with demonstrating a variety of teaching

methods? How did this session show how to include all students? What strategies were

used to help develop students’ social and communication needs?

5. Find a session that does not rely upon “deficit language” when referring to students

with disabilities. How does “deficit language” contribute to marginalization of students

with disabilities? What other language might we use?

6. Find a session that describes the role and importance of having trained,

knowledgeable, prepared paraeducators. What can you do to improve interactions

between paraeducators and students; and between paraeducators and art educators?

7. Find a children’s story that can be used to inspire inclusive practices with dance. How

does that movement teach inclusivity?

The use of Find Cards as differentiated assessment is valuable in fostering the exchange

of ideas with people different from oneself. The communitarian art class that aspires to include

all learners depends upon the art teacher to foster a climate of respect in creating a safe

place for all learners (Nordlund, Speirs, & Stewart, 2010). This is often achieved by facilitating

dialogue through providing open-ended prompts and questions, such as those demonstrated

in the use of Find Cards as an instructional strategy and model of assessment that is flexible

in meeting the needs of all learners. By building a community of trust and respect, the art

educator supports the democratic values through the empowerment of students by virtue

of their differences as envisioned in the IDEA. With Find Cards, students are empowered to

share their art with one another in a way that furthers full participation, self-advocacy, and self-

determination as envisioned by federal law.

157

EMPOWERMENT THROUGH DIFFERENCE

References

Alley, K., Goldberger, G. G., & Robinson, R. (Producers), & Graeme, C. (Director). (2003). Profoundly

normal [Motion picture]. USA: Profound Productions/Randwell Productions.

Ball, C. A. (2005). Looking for theory in all the right places: Feminist and communitarian elements

of disability discrimination law. Ohio State Law Journal, 66, 105-175.

Barad, K. (2003). Posthumanist performativity: Toward an understanding of how matter comes to

matter. Signs: Journal of Women in Culture and Society, 28(3), 801–831.

Barad, K. (2007). Meeting the universe halfway: Quantum physics and the entanglement of matter

and meaning. Durham, NC: Duke University Press.

Brunvand, S., & Byr, S. (2011). Using VoiceThread® to promote learning engagement and success

for all students. The Council for Exceptional Children (CEC): TEACHING Exceptional

Children. Retrieved from: http://voicethread.com/media/misc/support/JTECVoiceThread.pdf

Chicago, Judy. (2012). Feminist art education: Made in California. In J. Fields (Ed.), Entering the

picture: The Fresno Feminist Art Program, and the collective visions of women artists (pp.

101-116). New York, NY: Routledge.

Davis, L. J. (2002). Bending over backwards: Disability, dismodernism, and other difficult positions.

New York, NY: New York University Press.

Draves, W. (2000). Teaching online. River Falls, WI: LERN Books.

Erevelles, N., & Kafer, A. (2010). Committed critique: An interview with Nirmala

Erevelles. In S. Burch & A. Kafer (Eds.), Deaf and disabilities studies: Interdisciplinary

perspectives (pp. 204-221). Washington, DC: Gallaudet University Press.

Freedman, K. (2003). Teaching visual culture: Curriculum, aesthetics, and the social life of art. New

York, NY: Teachers College Press. Reston, VA: National Art Education Association.

Freire, P. (1990). Pedagogy of the oppressed. New York, NY: Continuum.

Individuals with Disabilities Education Improvement Act of 2004, 20 U.S.C. §§ 1401 et seq. (2004).

Individual with Disabilities Education Improvement Act of 2004 Regulations, 34 C.F.R. §§ 300 et

seq. (2006).

Hayles, N. K. (1999). How we became posthuman: Virtual bodies in cybernetics, literature, and

informatics. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.

158

EMPOWERMENT THROUGH DIFFERENCE

Keifer-Boyd, K., Knight, W. B., Knochel, A., Liao, C., Meier, M. E., Patton, R., Shin,

R., Sweeny, R. (2013). Moving Mountains (14 min. video). Retrieved from https://

streaming.psu.edu/media/?movieId=24413.

Keifer-Boyd, K., & Kraft, L. M. (November 2003). Inclusion policy in practice. Art Education:

The Journal of the National Art Education Association, 56(6), 46-53.

Keifer-Boyd, K., & Maitland-Gholson, J. (2007). Engaging visual culture. Worchester, MA: Davis

Publications.

Kraft, M. (2006). Art education and disability: Re-envisioning educational efficiency. The Journal

for Social Theory in Art Education, 26, 302-320.

Kraft, M., & Keifer-Boyd, K. (2013). Including difference: A communitarian approach to art

education in the least restrictive environment. Reston, VA: National Art Education

Association.

No Child Left Behind/Elementary and Secondary Schools Act. 20 U.S.C. §§6301 et seq. (2001).

Nordlund, C., Speirs, P., & Stewart, M. (2010). An invitation to social change: Fifteen principles

for teaching art. Art Education, 63(5), 36-43.

Patterson, L. (2010). Unlikely alliances: Crossing the deaf and hearing divide. In S. Burch & A.

Kafer (Eds.), Deaf and disabilities studies: Interdisciplinary perspectives (pp. 144-161).

Washington, DC: Gallaudet University Press.

Taylor, N., & Chacksfield, J. (2005). ICT for learners with special needs: A handbook for tutors.

London: David Fulton Publishers Ltd.

Turnbull, H. R. (1991, October). The communitarian perspective: Thoughts on the future for

people with developmental disabilities. Paper presented at the meeting of the North

Carolina Developmental Disabilities Planning Council, Raleigh, NC.

Wexler, A. (2009). Art and disability: The social and political struggles facing education. New

York, NY: Palgrave.

Wilson, C., & Wright, L. (1994). Enhancing access to knowledge. In J. I. Goodlad & P. Keating

(Eds.), Access to knowledge: The continuing agenda for our nation’s schools (Rev. ed.,

pp. 223-236). New York, NY: College Entrance Examination Board.

159

Tools and Stories: Preparing Music Educators for Successful Inclusive Classrooms Through Universal Design for Learning

RHONDA VIETH FUELBERTH AND LYNDA EWELL LAIRD

Effective inclusive learning takes place in classrooms where equity is commonplace,

where students are treated as people and not as labels, where all students have access to high-

quality, engaging, music/arts instruction, where all students feel valued, where all students’

strengths are recognized, and where teachers, students, and peers are partners in creating and

problem solving. Professor in Music and Human Learning at the University of Texas at Austin,

Robert Duke asserted that we must have a “vision of students as accomplished learners.”

He further described these accomplished learners as “attentive, diligent, inquisitive, skillful,

persistent, patient, thoughtful, meticulous, and discriminating” (slide 6, 2009). To establish

learning environments where these conditions exist, and where accomplished learners thrive,

curriculum must be thoughtfully developed, and artistically implemented. Universal Design for

Learning is a meaningful framework for creating such conditions (Darrow, 2010).

The concept of universal design originated in the field of architecture. Rather than

retrofitting architectural design to meet the needs of individuals with a variety of needs,

building and facility design now endeavors to proactively ensure accessibility for all.

The focus of universal design is not on providing special segregated facilities (ramps,

lifts, etc.) for physically disabled persons to enter and use the built environment, but

rather seeking to provide an inclusive environment that considers the potential ability

of all people through the creation of products and environments that everyone can use,

regardless of age, physique and degree of disability (Seirlis, 2003).

When the same proactive approach is applied to education, and specifically arts and

music education, educational experiences are designed in a way that proactively ensure

accessibility (Pisha, & Coyne, 2001). This approach is fundamentally different than attempting

only to adapt or modify instruction, or to accommodate a specific set of needs. Many

strategies, adaptations, and accommodations, when implemented for the entire group, make

music materials and objectives more accessible for all learners. Many of these adjustments are

160

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

considered master teacher techniques, and not only benefit students with exceptionalities, but

also students who are not receiving special education services.

Universal Design for Learning is an educational approach with three primary

principles (1) multiple means of representation, to give diverse learners options for acquiring

information and knowledge; (2) multiple means of action and expression, to provide learners

options for demonstrating what they know, and (3) multiple means of engagement, to tap into

learners’ interests, offer appropriate challenges, and increase motivation. This paper provides

specific examples of strategies and ideas organized using the UDL guidelines developed by

CAST (Center for Applied Special Technology). The guidelines provide an excellent roadmap

for not only designing arts education experiences, but also for analyzing accessible arts

curricula and lesson design (CAST, 2011; Glass, Meyer, & Rose, 2013). A summary of the

principles and respective guidelines is shown in Figure 1.

Universal Design for Learning Principles

Universal Design for Learning is based on brain research examining learner variability. In

the text Teaching Every Student in the Digital Age, Rose and Meyer (2002) defined three neural

networks that work independently and together in learning tasks.

Recognition networks are specialized to sense and assign meaning to patterns we see;

they enable us to identify and understand information, ideas, and concepts.

Strategic networks are specialized to generate and oversee mental and motor patterns.

They enable us to plan, execute, and monitor actions and skills.

Affective networks are specialized to evaluate patterns and assign them emotional sig-

nificance; they enable us to engage with tasks and learning and with the world around

us (2002, p. 13).

Grounded in neuroscience research, Universal Design for Learning principles

for curriculum coordinate with the three neural networks described by Rose and Meyer

(2002). Principle 1 supports recognition learning by providing multiple, flexible methods of

presentation, Principle 2 supports strategic learning by providing multiple, flexible methods of

expression, and Principle 3 supports strategic learning by providing multiple, flexible options

for engagement. The Universal Design for Learning Guidelines Version 2.0 (CAST, 2011)

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

161

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

provides further detail regarding the implementation of the UDL framework, and also serves

as a learner variability litmus test for curriculum design and lesson planning. Within each UDL

guiding principle are a series of checkpoints. These guidelines and checkpoints serve as a

framework for the teaching strategies presented in this paper.

Graduate and Undergraduate Learning in Music and Special Education

To ensure appropriate preparation for teaching music in inclusive environments, the

University of Nebraska-Lincoln, Glenn Korff School of Music offers both an undergraduate

and graduate course in the field of music and special education. These courses are provided

within the School of Music so that individuals receive this essential training in a discipline-

specific environment. Students build a foundation of knowledge concerning federal and state

legislation, IEP’s, assessment, adaptation of curricular material, and current methodologies and

research using course texts, readings, and digital media (Adamek & Darrow, 2010; Hammel &

Hourigan, 2011). Students in both courses complete lesson and curriculum design assignments

using the Universal Design for Learning model. While this paper centers on music teacher

preparation programs, UDL is a model that works across disciplines, within and outside the arts,

providing a universal structure for accessibility (Courey, Tappe, Siker, & LePage, 2012).

UDL Principles, Guidelines, and Strategies

Graduate Student Contributions

Graduate students in the master’s program in music education are required to take a

3 credit hour course titled Inclusive Music Education. Using principles from the online text,

Teaching Every Student in the Digital Age: Universal Design for Learning by David Rose

and Anne Meyer (2002), and case studies, readings, and handouts from our course website,

graduate students working as in-service teachers contribute to our Universal Design for

Learning Strategy Bank. Several modules in the course precede the strategy bank assignment.

In these modules students become familiar with literature and research in music education for

children and adolescents with disabilities to include specifics about characteristics, disability

identifications, and subsequent challenges common to learners in public school settings.

These challenges may manifest themselves through differences in cognition, communication,

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

162

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

language and culture, behavioral or emotional challenges, sensory challenges, and/or physical

or medical conditions. Targeting the learning needs of students with specific learning strengths

and challenges, in-service teachers post multiple strategies for each of the UDL principles.

Undergraduate Student Contributions

Undergraduate students learn how to serve the needs of all of their students, including

students who receive special education services under the IDEA (Individuals with Disabilities

Act, formerly Public Law 94-142). For one requirement of the class, students complete a

Universal Design for Learning (UDL) lesson plan and peer teaching assignment in which they

adapt a current lesson plan into one that offers more variety in the ways they present concepts,

ask students to express their skills or knowledge, or engage their students.

The following provides an explanation of each UDL principle and strategies based on

UDL guidelines recommended by our graduate students in the UDL bank. Vignettes based on

undergraduate student lesson plans serve to illustrate how the UDL principles work within the

context of one lesson.

UDL Principle 1: Multiple Means of Representation

To support recognition learning, provide multiple, flexible methods of presentation

(CAST, 2011). Examples of strategies used to accomplish this goal include: (a) altering modes

of presentation to include use of multimedia in instruction, (b) altering printed materials-print

to speech and speech to print, (c) pre-teaching, (d) using digital materials, (e) creating student-

centered learning environments and activities, (f) using varied repetition, and (g) designing

activities that are multi-level and multi-sensory (see, for example, Goldman, 2003; Rao &

Gagie, 2006; Reimer & Moyer, 2005; Stahl, & Aronica, 2002; Strangman, & Hall, 2003; Tabbers,

Martens, & van Merriënboer, 2004; Vicente, Orrantia, &Verschaffel, 2007). For a summary of

UDL Principle 1, Guidelines 1-3, and suggested strategies, please see Figure 2.

Vignette 1

Hannah: Crackers and fruit snacks

There is laughter and wonder as Hannah begins her lesson by passing around salted

crackers and sugary fruit snacks. The students in the class are excited to find out what they will

163

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

do with these foods during this music lesson. She asks them to eat one cracker and describe

its shape, the way it tastes, the texture, or anything else they notice while eating it. They do

the same for the fruit snacks. They make a class list of descriptions on the white board (1:3.1;

3:7.2; see Figures 2-4). Crunchy. Salty. Square. Dry … Chewy. Fruity. Smooth. Juicy… The

students smile as they see the differences appear on the board and try to come up with even

more specific descriptions (2:4.1). Hannah explains, “this part of my lesson was to show you

that describing music can be just like describing food – and today we will listen to two musical

examples that are just as different as the cracker and the fruit snack. But before you tell me

words that describe the music, I’d like you to show me with your body. We’ll all move to the

music in different ways.” (2:4.1; 3:7.1)

First, she plays the madrigal Sing We and Chant It by Thomas Morley. Some of the

students giggle with surprise but begin moving in a light and flitting style. Others pretend

to hold teacups and bow to one another in a regal style. Others sway from side to side to

show the beat. Still others look around to borrow movement ideas from their peers. Next,

Hannah plays Sing, Sing, Sing, by the New York Voices (a vocal jazz ensemble). The students

immediately change their movements. The students use jazz hands, snap and sway, and even

pretend to play a number of instruments from the big band that accompanies the piece.

Next she asks the student to describe with words either what they heard or the

movement they created or saw a peer create. They make another contrasting list of

descriptions on the board (1:1.1). Light. Regal. Four voices. A cappella… Jazzy. Swinging.

Trumpets. Loud. Hannah says the students really like opportunities to move to music and learn

in different ways. She also reflects that while she gives her students quite a bit of freedom to

express themselves, they are all engaged and learning and much more creative than when

she had previously taught this lesson without the food and movement components. She also

really likes how she can assess her students in a variety of ways in this lesson – by their verbal

descriptions or their movements or a combination of the two (2:4.1).

UDL Principle 1, Guideline 1: Provide options for perception. Graduate

students recommended a number of strategies for UDL Principle 1, Guideline 1, providing

options for perception. To customize the display of instructional materials graduate students

164

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

suggested adjusting print media by de-cluttering pages highlighting relevant information,

and duplicating handouts and other print materials on a projector to allow for their guided

use. To make musical materials more accessible for all students, vary elements such as pitch

and tempo. Technology can be utilized to assist with this strategy. Applications like Audiosnail

allow tempo to be manipulated without changes in pitch. Color-code both fonts and notation

for ease of reading and better isolation of specific details of pitch and rhythm. This strategy

is supported by the work of researchers who examined the impact of color coding musical

notation (Kuo, & Chuang, 2013; Rogers, 1991).

To provide alternatives for audio and visual materials, use manipulatives to represent

musical elements such as note values, phrase contour, and form. Videos, pictures, graphics,

word webs, and digital posters can also be used to provide a visually rich learning environment.

Technology tools such as Glogster® provide media rich alternatives to presenting information.

Interactive white boards and document cameras can be used to present musical symbols,

terms, and instrument families. Projected musical scores allow guided and layered listening

opportunities. Engaging learners in kinesthetic activities through teacher-led movement

further enhances learning as students actively engage their whole bodies in the process. A few

examples of graduate student work further illustrate these strategies:

When learning a new concept or vocabulary term, instead of just reading it out loud or

having the students copying the definition right out of the book, I use a Frayer mod-

el (Frayer, Frederick, and Klausmeier, 1969) or word web and post the word, symbol,

etc., on our word wall in the front of the class room so students are always aware of our

new vocabulary.

Utilize the graphic generator on iTunes® to give students an illustration of dynamic

activity in the music.

Instead of always having the students try and figure out where exactly we are by saying

out loud a measure number, which continues to be difficult for some students, I scan

the music into my computer and then display it up on my SMART Board®. That way

if I want to point out a specific term or symbol, I can just circle it on the board so that

students can locate it much faster in their music.

165

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

UDL Principle 1, Guideline 2: Provide options for language, expressions, and

sym To clarify vocabulary and symbols prevalent in musical materials, graduate students

suggested using traditional bulletin boards to illustrate concepts. Rather than decorating the

room with multiple bulletin boards, introduce bulletin boards slowly, teaching the concepts

presented in each board before introducing new material. Project vocabulary or share it with

the option of embedded links in technology-based materials. To decode text notation, and

symbols, use a systematic approach to reading notation, with visual supports such as projected

solfège syllables, reinforced through body movement such as hand signs to represent pitch.

In the choral/vocal environment, adopt an everyone sings all the time approach to learning

music, so that singers are not sitting idly while a one voice part (soprano, alto, tenor, or bass)

rehearses. Students benefit from more repetition for improved sight-singing, and better

understanding of the entire musical score. Use multiple media to pre-teach as well as reinforce

musical learning. Provide access to recordings and online materials such as a YouTube®

channel so that students experience music before it is encountered in the classroom,

reinforcing learning parallel to classroom work.

Since learner variability is present in reading printed text, it is also a factor in reading

musical notation, which is an abstract representation of an aural phenomenon. Many musicians

and educators have developed ways of varying notation systems. Figure 5 illustrates one

notation style used in the 19th century to adjust notation elements of pitch and rhythm through

manipulation of shape (Grayson, 2012). Today, a variety of technologies give educators many

options for adjusting notation for a variety of learners. Online notation programs such as

Noteflight® allow educators to enter notation and share music through an online environment.

Notation can be color coded, and simplified. Noteflight® users can add or take away individual

elements of the score to vary the complexity of the musical material displayed. Playback is

adjustable in terms of isolating various parts, transposing music to key areas most accessible to

individual students, and even slowing tempo without altering pitch.

bols.

UDL Principle 1, Guideline 3: Provide options for comprehension. To aid com-

prehension, graduate students stated the importance of activating background knowledge, as-

sisting students in making connections with prior musical encounters, and making connections

166

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

to popular music. Highlight critical features by creating musical materials with fewer items on

the page, or highlight individual voice or instrumental parts. Use task analyses to guide infor-

mation processing and isolate and structure sequencing for learning musical concepts such as

pitch and rhythm. Orff process, often used in elementary music instruction, contains a number

of UDL friendly elements such as varied repetition, connecting speech to rhythmic understand-

ing, and use of movement as a way to connect physically with music.

Provide models of final products to support memory and information transfer.

Intentionally teach for transfer of skills and knowledge from one learning experience to the

next. Consistent use of varied repetition enables learning activities that support one musical

concept, thereby solidifying learning. Mnemonic devices help learners remember important

information. One graduate student writes about a concept oriented approach, “For each

concept that I teach, I provide a variety of activities that reinforce the objective. Usually there

is a song, instrument piece, notation activity, movement activity and game that all practice that

particular skill.”

UDL Principle 2: Provide Multiple Means of Action and Expression

To support strategic learning, provide multiple, flexible methods of expression and

apprenticeship (CAST, 2011). Graduate students’ examples of strategies reflecting this

principle include: (a) varying options for methods of expression; (b) giving students options

for demonstrating understanding of musical concepts to include singing, playing, moving,

improvising, and composing; (d) using self- and peer-evaluation; (e) using continuous, formative

assessment; and (f) implementing graphic organizers (see, for example, Meltzer, 2007; Mosco,

2005; Orsmond, Merry, & Reiling, 2002; Stoner, Beck, Bock, Hickey, Kosuwan, & Thompson,

2006; Strangman, Hall, & Meyer, 2003; Webre, 2005; Zimmerman, & Kitsantas, 2005). For a

summary of UDL Principle 2, Guidelines 4-6, and suggested strategies, please see Figure 3.

Vignette 2

Meghan: Paper plates

With no instruments and no budget for her lesson, Meghan needed to really think

outside the box when she planned to have her students practice the skill of keeping the beat

167

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

(1:1.1). Then it occurred to her that paper plates are inexpensive and could be used in some

really creative ways. As Meghan starts the music, each student receives a white paper plate and

they began imitating their teacher by tapping their plate to the beat (1:3.3). She pauses the

music after a few seconds. “Now, I’d like to see just how creative you can be with your plate

and the beat today. As we go around the circle, you need to show your peers a new way of

keeping the beat. It can be silent or make sound as long as it is on the beat” (3:7.1).

Student creativity blooms as students tap the plate, move it front and back, side-to-

side, and even toss it in the air and catch it to the beat – all creating original and unexpected

visual representations of the beat. Meghan notices that the visual and aural combination some

of the students create are the most engaging and that students enjoy being able to create their

own way to keep the beat (2:4.1). She also really likes that the students are leading one another

– giving her the freedom to take an individual assessment of each student’s skill level.

UDL Principle 2, Guideline 4: Provide options for physical action. To vary meth-

ods of response and capacity to navigate the physical environment, graduate students advo-

cated the use of portable or classroom whiteboards, giving students the ability to respond from

where they are seated. Personal hand held white boards (low-tech) or tablet devices (high-tech)

provide many options for student responses both musical and non-musical. Many students

need time for metacognition, and additional processing. Classroom discussion and cooperative

learning models such as Think, Pair, Share (Lyman 1981) provide options for student engage-

ment. Cooperative learning and individual learning can be implemented in a variety of music

classroom environments, while singing, playing, improvising, and composing.

Students should have a variety of options to demonstrate learning, through a number

of formative and summative alternate assessment options. For example, students may choose

to sing or play compositions rather than notating them. Informal, embedded assessment might

include students moving their hands close together or far apart to demonstrate understanding

of dynamic contrast, or using contrasting movements to demonstrate understanding of form.

Formally, alternatives for written quizzes might include verbal quizzes. Playing tests might be

completed using video recording equipment or in front of a smaller group rather than in front

of the entire group.

168

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

Improvisation and composition activities present opportunities for flexible methods

of expression. Capitalize on student strengths by providing options to improvise or compose

with partners or in small groups (Bell, 2008). Technology provides a growing number of ways

to demonstrate learning. Technology tools like Garageband®, Noteflight®, Bloom® and other

composition tools allow learners to express themselves musically regardless of achievement

level. A variety of computer games and apps enable students to learn independently or in

small groups. Technology devices add an appealing gaming element to learning. Students

can focus on a number of skills and concepts such as ear training, music literacy, improvisation,

accompanying, and using a variety of rehearsal/performance tools. Examples of graduate

student work further illustrate these strategies:

I often give my students options on how they want to present an assignment to me. For

instance, playing tests can be done in person, recorded and turned in, played with a

partner, etc., as long as they show me what they have learned.

I try to give multiple assessments for different concepts being learned. I have a work-

sheet type assessment, a “clicker” assessment, and a spoken assessment. If a student

does particularly well in one style and not the others, I can use that knowledge to more

accurately assess that student.

When completing the rhythm of the day exercise, students can respond by counting

and clapping their hands, use rhythm sticks, stomping their feet, or moving any part of

their body to demonstrate the rhythm.

When learning BAG on recorder, we learn the fingerings on wrists only, play a BAG

game to reinforce fingerings, and then finally apply it to the instrument so that they

have had tactile and mental practice before getting to make the sound.

UDL Principle 2, Guideline 5: Provide for flexibility in expression and

communication. Emphasizing the importance of communication with all students, Guideline

5 addresses access to assistive technology. Graduate students advised teachers to give a

variety of options for expression, many of which integrate technology. Offer a variety of

media options for student expression, including PowerPoint®, Keynote®, and Prezi®. Low-

169

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

tech options might include expressing knowledge in drawings or cartoons. Notation and

improvisation applications can be useful tools for composition and construction. Students

may also expand on composition/improvisation skills by engaging in activities in which partial

completion of composition elements is required. For example, the music teacher provides the

first two measures of a melody and asks the student to finish the musical sentence. Provide

support for practice and performance by integrating checklists for performance skills, and

varying or strengthening practice routines. Use programs like SmartMusic® as incentives for

goal achievement. SmartMusic® is an interactive music education program that allows students

to play or sing along with musical examples shown on the computer screen. The program

gives immediate feedback showing correct pitches and rhythms in green and errors in red. The

program tracks and monitors student progress so they can see improvement over time.

UDL Principle 2, Guideline 6: Provide options for executive functioning. CAST

guideline developers define executive function as the “capabilities that allow humans to over-

come impulsive, short-term reactions to their environment and instead to set long-term goals,

plan effective strategies for reaching those goals, monitor their progress, and modify strate-

gies as needed” (CAST, 2011, p. 25). Graduate students posited that guided goal setting can

strengthen performance. Student developed goals and objectives can be in the form of journ-

aling, checklists, rubrics, and other graphic or pictorial representations, to aid them in tracking

and monitoring progress. Plan for specific, frequent, and immediate feedback, to assist stu-

dents in managing information and resources. One graduate student illustrated this:

I give students that succeed quickly the chance to compose for the class. While I work

with the rest of the class, a student who may otherwise be bored repeating something

they’ve mastered gets 4-8 rhythm cards and a chord structure. I allow them to choose

from 3-4 pitches for each measure (within the chord structure) and they decide which or-

der to put the rhythm cards in and then assign pitches to each note. Once they’re done,

they can perform for the class and since I designated the chords and only gave them

certain note options I am able to create an accompaniment for their composition.

170

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

UDL Principle 3: Provide Multiple Means of Engagement

To support affective learning, provide multiple, flexible options for engagement (CAST,

2011). A sample of strategies to support this principle includes: (a) planning for meaningful

and relevant artistic experiences, (b) offering choices of content and materials, (c) offering

adjustable levels of challenge, and (d) offering choices of rewards and learning contexts (see,

for example, Assor, Kaplan, & Roth, 2002; Cameron, & Pierce, 2006; Immordino-Yang, &

Damasio, 2007; Kamins, & Dweck, 1999; Ryan, & Deci, 2000; Shogren, Faggella-Luby, Bae,

& Wehmeyer, 2004; Stefanou, Perencevich, DiCintio, & Turner, 2004; Suarez, 2007). For a

summary of UDL Principle 3, Guidelines 7-9, and suggested strategies, please see Figure 4.

Vignette 3

Gary: Large scale floor staff

As students enter the room they spot something large and somewhat familiar on the

floor. The peer teacher for the day, Gary, has placed five long lines of tape on the tiles to create

a musical staff (1:1.1). “Today in class we are going to learn about the musical staff and get

some practice moving around on it with our bodies and our voices.” He chooses one student

to stand on a line and another to stand on a space between the lines to show where notes can

be placed.

Next, Gary asks another student to start anywhere on the staff and then move either

up or down the staff to show higher or lower pitches (2:4.1). He asks the rest of the class to

vocalize along with the student who is moving, so that everyone sees and hears the pitch

changing (1:2.3; 2:4.1). The whole class sings “loo” while the volunteer moves up and down

first slowly, and then quickly as she realizes she has the command of the entire class. She even

tries hopping from high, middle, and low on the staff to try to challenge her peers. Gary

doesn’t have any problem getting additional students to volunteer for this job. In fact, every

student wants a chance to lead the class (3:7.1; 3:8.3). Gary reflects that this is a much more

enjoyable and engaging way to introduce the concept of a staff that he normally would have

done without singing or movement. He also observes that the students have a more authentic

understanding of the function of the staff at the end of the lesson.

171

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

engagement and interest is related to individual choice and student autonomy. Graduate

students suggested that students be given a variety of musical material choices. Give students

opportunities to make musical decisions, such as interpretation of various musical elements

in a score, or in the development of actions or dances that enhance performance. Musical

experiences are more meaningful when social and cultural relevance is established. Enhance

interest by providing musical materials that reflect the varied social and cultural backgrounds

of students. To support autonomy, students can measure their musical development through

baseline assessments, and subsequent measures of individual progress.

Focusing on student interests enhances relevance and authenticity in musical

experience. Students who lead activities or warm-ups share in ownership of the learning

environment. Optimized interests are achieved in learning environments that are safe and

free from threats or distractions. Established routines and teacher support can minimize

performance anxiety. Providing frequent opportunities for students to play solos or duets can

lessen pressure in assessment or formal performance situations.

Two graduate students gave specific examples of strategies to enhance student interest

by providing performance and assessment options:

During our recorder unit, we practice as a group the majority of the time. I also

have them work in small groups on songs they want to practice. Then I give them

opportunities to perform for the class, alone or with a friend, if they are interested.

When grading playing assessments I use a baseline at the beginning of the year and

grade primarily on improvement. This allows students to play things slower or make

other adjustments that will allow them to be successful.

Two other graduate students illustrated the importance of capitalizing on specific

student interests, and allowing students to create and share their own music:

Find examples that pertain directly to your students. If you have a student that is

struggling to pay attention, but really enjoys cars, make the rhythms about cars for the

day (i.e., Ford, Chevy, Mitsubishi, etc.) Allow students to also explore this to keep them

more engaged.

Student UDL Principle 3, Guideline 7: Optimize and recruit student interest.

172

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

Last semester we started having an ‘open mic’ every Friday they had class (we’re on the

block [schedule] so it ended up being about every other Friday). The students were

able to engage in concepts taught and learned through their own personal music cre-

ation and then had the opportunity to share with the class.

UDL Principle 3, Guideline 8: Optimize sustained effort and persistence.

Graduate student work illuminated the importance of both group and individual goals and ob-

jectives. To optimize challenge, which will enhance effort, encourage students to reach succes-

sive approximations toward a goal. Base progress on models, but encourage self-assessment

with an emphasis on effort rather than achievement.

Provide multiple opportunities to participate in small groups to foster partnerships,

collaboration, and community. Musical games such as music basketball or baseball provide

high interest student directed opportunities for growth. One teacher shared an example of a

gaming activity, “When teaching the pattern “do, re, mi,” I have students read flashcards, sing

the patterns, and play a game where one student sings a pattern and the others have to find

the matching notation.” Encourage students to continue participation in music making outside

of the school environment, to further effort and persistence.

Graduate

students shared ideas about a variety of reward systems such as awards for achievement. One

teacher uses sticker charts to track achievement while another strings teacher provides mini

Karate belts that are colored ribbons that can be tied on to string pegs when certain goals are

achieved. To ensure that students are engaged in self-regulation, teachers can invite learners

to share in the creation of self-monitoring systems. The learner can then use the system to

monitor behavior independently. Many graduate students addressed the importance of self-as-

sessment and reflection, most frequently citing the use of self-evaluations of rehearsals and

performances.

After concerts, we watch the video of the concert in class, and I try to come up with a

creative writing assignment that involves them critiquing themselves. One example of

something I’ve used in the past is a R.A.F.T (Role Audience Format Topic). I had their

UDL Principle 3, Guideline 9: Provide options for self-regulation.

173

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

Role be a music critic for a newspaper or magazine; they got to pick and create their

own papers or magazine names. The Audience was of course the readers of the articles,

which would be classmates. The Format was at least a 3 paragraph, with complete sen-

tences, typed or written (for those who didn’t have access to a computer, journal arti-

cle. The Topic was, of course, the concert. I gave them guidelines for what they needed

in each of the paragraphs. I actually had a lot of students really get into what they were

doing and enjoyed sharing their articles, which I read and gave them a grade for.

Conclusion

When teachers employ Universal Design for Learning as a framework for lesson

planning, teaching, and learning very few additional accommodations or modifications are

needed. By systematically gathering and synthesizing graduate students’ Universal Design

for Learning ideas, as a result of their teacher in-service experiences, shared ideas become

shared ideals with the promise of a music and arts education that provides meaningful artistic

participation for all students.

References

Adamek, M. S. & Darrow, A. A. (2010). Music in special education. Location?American Music

Therapy Association.

Assor, A., Kaplan, H., & Roth, G. (2002). Choice is good, but relevance is excellent: Autonomy-

enhancing and suppressing teacher behaviours predicting students” engagement in

schoolwork. British Journal of Educational Psychology, 72(2), 261-278.

Bell, A. P. (2008). The heart of the matter: Composing music with an adolescent with special

needs. International Journal of Education & the Arts, 9(9).

CAST (2011). Universal Design for Learning Guidelines version 2.0. Wakefield, MA: CAST.

Cameron, J., & Pierce, W. D. (2006). Rewards and intrinsic motivation: Resolving the

controversy. Charlotte, North Carolina: Information Age Publishing.

Courey, S. J., Tappe, P., Siker, J., & LePage, P. (2012). Improved lesson planning with universal

design for learning (UDL). Teacher Education and Special Education: The Journal of the

Teacher Education Division of the Council for Exceptional Children, 36(1), 7-27.

174

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

Darrow, A. (2010). Music Education for All: Employing the Principles of Universal Design to

Educational Practice. General Music Today, 24(1), 43-45.

Duke, R. (2009, April). Why students don’t learn what we think we teach them. Hot Science

– Cool Talks. Volume 60: Tyrone Hayes Lecture Series of the Environmental Science

Institute of the University of Texas at Austin, Austin, TX. Retrieved from http://www.esi.

utexas.edu/outreach/ols/lectures/ppts/60.pdf.

Frayer, D., Frederick, W. C., and Klausmeier, H. J. (1969). A schema for testing the level of

cognitive mastery. Madison, WI: Wisconsin Center for Education Research.

Glass, D., Meyer, A., & Rose, D. H., (2013). Universal design for learning and the arts. Harvard

Educational Review 83(1), 98-119, 266, 270, 272.

Goldman, S. R. (2003). Learning in complex domains: When and why do multiple

representations help? Learning & Instruction, 13(2), 239-244.

Grayson, L. (2012). A beginner’s guide to shapenote singing: Hints, stories, advice, and

minutiae. 5th edition. Location: publisher?

Hammel,A. & Hourigan, R. (2011). Teaching music to students with special needs: A label-free

approach.location? Oxford University Press.

Immordino-Yang, M. H., & Damasio, A. R. (2007). We feel, therefore we learn: The relevance of

affective and social neuroscience to education. Mind, Brain, and Education, 1(1), 3-10.

Kamins, M. L., & Dweck, C. S. (1999). Person versus process praise and criticism: Implications

for contingent self-worth and coping. Developmental Psychology, 35(3), 835-847.

Kuo, Y., & Chuang, M. (2013). A proposal of a color music notation system on a single melody

for music beginners. International Journal of Music Education, 31(4), 394-412.

Lyman, F. (1981). The responsive classroom discussion: The inclusion of all students.

Mainstreaming Digest. College Park, MD: University of Maryland.

Meltzer, L. (2007). Executive function in education: From theory to practice. New York, NY:

Guilford Press.

Mosco, M. (2005). Getting the information graphically. Arts and Activities, 138(1), 44-44.

175

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

Orsmond, P., Merry, S., & Reiling, K. (2002). The use of exemplars and formative feedback

when using student derived marking criteria in peer and self-assessment. Assessment &

Evaluation in Higher Education, 27(4), 309-323.

Pisha, B., & Coyne, P. (2001). Smart from the start: The promise of universal design for

learning. Remedial and Special Education, 22(4), 197-203.

Rao, S. M., & Gagie, B. (2006). Learning through seeing and doing: Visual supports for children

with autism. Teaching Exceptional Children, 38(6), 26-33.

Reimer, K., & Moyer, P. S. (2005). Third-graders learn about fractions using virtual manipulatives:

A classroom study. Journal of Computers in Mathematics and Science Teaching, 24(1),

5-25.

Rogers, G. L. (1991). Effect of color-coded notation on music achievement of elementary

instrumental students. Journal of Research in Music Education, 39(1), 64-73.

Rose, D. H., & Meyer, A. (2002). Teaching every student in the Digital Age: Universal design for

learning. Alexandria, Va: Association for Supervision and Curriculum Development.

Ryan, R. M., & Deci, E. L. (2000). Self-determination theory and the facilitation of intrinsic

motivation, social development, and well-being. American Psychologist, 55(1), 68-78.

Seirlis, J. (October, 2003). Universal design towards inclusive environments. Paper presented

at The Renaissance, African Disability: Rotary International African Conference, Durban,

South Africa.

Shogren, K. A., Faggella-Luby, M. N., Bae, S. J., & Wehmeyer, M.L. (2004). The effect of choice-

making as an intervention for problem behavior: A meta-analysis. Journal of Positive

Behavior Interventions, 6(4), 228-237.

Stahl, S., & Aronica, M. (2002). Digital text in the classroom. Journal of Special Education

Technology, 17(2), 57-59.

Stefanou, C. R., Perencevich, K. C., DiCintio, M., & Turner, J. C. (2004). Supporting

autonomy in the classroom: Ways teachers encourage student decision making and

ownership. Educational Psychologist, 39(2), 97-110.

176

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

Stoner, J. B., Beck, A. R., Bock, S. J., Hickey, K., Kosuwan, K., & Thompson, J. R. (2006).

The effectiveness of the picture exchange communication system with nonspeaking

adults. Remedial & Special Education, 27(3), 154-165.

Strangman, N., & Hall, T. E. (2003). Text transformations. Wakefield, MA: National Center on

Accessing the General Curriculum.

Strangman, N., Hall, T. E., & Meyer, A. (2003). Graphic organizers with UDL. Wakefield, MA:

National Center on Accessing the General Curriculum.

Suarez, D. (2007). When students choose the challenge. Educational Leadership, 65(3), 60-65.

Tabbers, H. K., Martens, R. L., & van Merriënboer, J. J. G. (2004). Multimedia instructions and

cognitive load theory: Effects of modality and cueing. British Journal of Educational

Psychology, 74(1), 71-81.

Vicente, S., Orrantia, J., & Verschaffel, L. (2007). Influence of situational and conceptual

rewording on word problem solving. British Journal of Educational Psychology, 77(4),

829-848.

Webre, E. C. (2005). Enhancing reading success with collaboratively created progress

charts. Intervention in School and Clinic, 40(5), 291-295.

Zimmerman, B. J., & Kitsantas, A. (2005). The hidden dimension of personal competence:

Self regulated learning and practice. In A. J. Elliot, & C. S. Dweck (Eds.), Handbook of

competence and motivation (pp. 509-526). New York, NY: Guilford Press.

177

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

Figure 1. Universal Design for Learning Principles and Guidelines (CAST, 2011).

178

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

UDL Principle 1-Provide multiple means of representation

UDL Guideline 1-Provide options for perception

UDL Guideline 2-Provide options for language,

expressions, and symbols

UDL Guideline 3-Provide options for comprehension

1.1 Customize the display of information• Adjust print materials:

de-clutter, highlight, color code

• Project music/handouts to allow for guided use

• Vary musical elements (pitch, tempo, etc.) *Audiosnail (alters tempo while maintaining pitch)

1.2 & 1.3 Provide alternatives for audio/visual materials• Use manipulatives for note

values, phrase contour, form, etc.

• Vary visual representations through videos, pictures, graphics, word webs, digital posters

* Glogster (digital multimedia posters)

• SMARTBoard, document camera (instrument families, symbols, terms, projected scores for guided listening and singing/playing)

• Engage students in teacher-led movement

2.1 Clarify vocabulary and symbols• Use traditional bulletin

boards to illustrate concepts

• Project vocabulary with embedded links if possible

2.2 Clarify syntax and structure2.3 Decode text, notation, and symbols• Use a systematic approach

to reading notation• Project solfège/sight

singing or write exercises on a board

• Use hand signs or body movement to reinforce pitch differences

• Choral/vocal environment (all sing focus of attention on one part)

2.5 Illustrate through multiple media• Pre-teach music

(recordings, online website materials, YouTube channel with recordings of rehearsals, etc.)

* Noteflight (vary complexity of notation displayed, layered listening, adjustable playback)

3.1 Activate background knowledge• Make connections with prior

musical encounters• Make connections to popular

music3.2 Highlight critical features• Create musical materials with

fewer items on the page• Highlight individual voice or

instrument parts3.3 Guide information processing• Task analysis (isolate

elements of music pitch, rhythm, etc.)

• Orff process (varied repetition, connecting speech to rhythmic understanding, and movement to connect physically to music)

3.4 Support memory and transfer• Provide models of final

products• Use varied repetition

(all activities around one concept)

• Use mnemonic devices to reinforce concepts

Figure 2. UDL Principle 1, Guidelines 1-3, and Strategies (CAST, 2011).

179

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

UDL Principle 2-Provide multiple means of action and expression

UDL Guideline 4-Provide options for physical action

UDL Guideline 5-Provide for flexibility in expression and

communication

UDL Guideline 6-Provide options for executive

functions

4.1 Response and navigation• Use portable or classroom

whiteboards or tablets• Provide additional time for

student responses• Think-Pair-Share• Cooperative and individual

learning-singing, playing, improvising, and composing

• Sing/play compositions rather than notate

• Use alternate assessments (verbal quiz, playing test options, etc.)

• Alter playing tests using video recordings or testing in front of small group rather than entire class

• Use movement (ex. move hands close together or far apart to show contrast in dynamics, or using varying actions to demonstrate understanding of form)

• Lyrics or melody rewrites4.2 Tools and technology• Games and apps

(ear training, music literacy, improvisation, accompaniments, rehearsal tools)

* Garageband, Noteflight, Bloom (other composition tools)

5.1 Media for communication (composition)• Allow students to present

work using a variety of media (Power Point, Prezi, Keynote, drawings, cartoons)

5.2 Tools for composition and construction• Notation and

improvisation programs/apps

• Experimental/alternative composition tools

• Partial completion of composition elements

5.3 Support for practice and performance• Checklists for

performance skills• Varying and solidifying

practice routines (Smart Music, etc.)

6.1 Guide goal setting• Group/individual

objectives and sequence in written form

• Student-developed goals and objectives with teacher guidance

• Checklists6.2 Support planning and strategy• Journals• Models/Peer Models• 6.3 Manage information

and resources• Provide specific,

frequent, and immediate feedback

• Insert frequent questions for monitoring

6.4 Monitoring progress• Use checklists, charts,

graphs to show student progress-specifically charting improvement

Figure 3. UDL Principle 2, Guidelines 4-6, and Strategies (CAST, 2011).

180

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

UDL Principle 3-Provide multiple means of engagement

UDL Guideline 7-Optimize and recruit student interest

UDL Guideline 8-Optimize sustained effort and

persistence

UDL Guideline 9-Provide options for self-regulation

7.1 Individual choice and autonomy• Allow student choice

of musical materials or assignments

• Encourage student input on musical decisions

• Ensure social/cultural relevance to enhance meaning

• Use baseline assessment and follow up measures to show progress

• Movement-allow students to make up actions/dances

7.2 Enhance relevance and authenticity• Focus on student interests• Allow students to lead

activities/warm-ups7.3 Minimize threats and distractions• Provide comfort through

predictable routines• Work through performance

anxiety issues as a group• Provide frequent

opportunities to play solos, duets to lessen pressure in assessment or performance situations

8.1 Heighten salience of objectives• Group emphasis on goals• State objectives

frequently• 8.2 Optimize challenge• Encourage students

to reach successive approximations to goals

• Measure progress individually

8.3 Foster collaboration and community• Utilize small groups,

partnerships, etc.• Frequent incorporation

of games-student choice-music basketball/baseball, review

• Provide and/or encourage out of class opportunities for music engagement

8.4 Mastery-oriented feedback• Emphasize effort as well

as achievement

9.1 Optimize motivation• Provide awards for

achievement (sticker charts, etc.)

• Be creative with reinforcement (ex. students earn a different colored Karate belt for completing certain tasks-colored ribbon tied onto pegs on stringed instrument)

9.2 Facilitate coping skills

9.3 Develop self-assessment and reflection• Self-evaluation rehearsal/

performance-formal and informal

Figure 4. UDL Principle 3, Guidelines 7-9, and Strategies (CAST, 2011).

181

INCLUSIVE CLASSROOMS THROUGH UDL

UDL Principle 3-Provide multiple means of engagement

UDL Guideline 7-Optimize and recruit student interest

UDL Guideline 8-Optimize sustained effort and

persistence

UDL Guideline 9-Provide options for self-regulation

7.1 Individual choice and autonomy• Allow student choice

of musical materials or assignments

• Encourage student input on musical decisions

• Ensure social/cultural relevance to enhance meaning

• Use baseline assessment and follow up measures to show progress

• Movement-allow students to make up actions/dances

7.2 Enhance relevance and authenticity• Focus on student interests• Allow students to lead

activities/warm-ups7.3 Minimize threats and distractions• Provide comfort through

predictable routines• Work through performance

anxiety issues as a group• Provide frequent

opportunities to play solos, duets to lessen pressure in assessment or performance situations

8.1 Heighten salience of objectives• Group emphasis on goals• State objectives

frequently• 8.2 Optimize challenge• Encourage students

to reach successive approximations to goals

• Measure progress individually

8.3 Foster collaboration and community• Utilize small groups,

partnerships, etc.• Frequent incorporation

of games-student choice-music basketball/baseball, review

• Provide and/or encourage out of class opportunities for music engagement

8.4 Mastery-oriented feedback• Emphasize effort as well

as achievement

9.1 Optimize motivation• Provide awards for

achievement (sticker charts, etc.)

• Be creative with reinforcement (ex. students earn a different colored Karate belt for completing certain tasks-colored ribbon tied onto pegs on stringed instrument)

9.2 Facilitate coping skills

9.3 Develop self-assessment and reflection• Self-evaluation rehearsal/

performance-formal and informal

Figure 5. Shapenote examples. C major scale in the fasola tradition. New Britain from The Sacred Harp, (Grayson, 2012).

182

Developing Curricula and Assessment Tools for the Physically Integrated Dance Class

MARK TOMASIC

Physically integrated dance unites the talents of dancers both with and without

disabilities. Its roots are based in the disability rights movement and the disability arts

movement that emerged amidst the social and cultural upheaval in the United States in the

1960’s and 1970’s (Benjamin, 2002). The early years of physically integrated dance consisted

of individuals and small groups exploring movement vocabulary on their own and sharing

that vocabulary with fellow dancers and groups of students. Today, the field of physically

integrated dance has expanded worldwide and includes professional companies, community

organizations, individual artists, educators, and dancers who practice and perform dances

ranging from hip-hop to ballet. However, despite this expansion, huge gaps remain in access to

formalized dance training for people with disabilities.

In 1990, the passage of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) assured equality of

opportunity and full participation for people with disabilities (U.S. Department of Justice, 2009).

While equality of opportunity can be provided through modification of devices or equipment

(i.e., an elevator for a person who is physically unable to climb stairs, or a book translated to

Braille for a person who is blind), providing full participation is a more complex undertaking

replete with innate challenges and rewards. Adam Benjamin, co-founder of London’s physically

integrated Candoco Dance Company, notes the discrepancy between providing equal

opportunity and full participation in regards to dance training for people with disabilities:

Today, with more and more schools and public buildings being made accessible, the

future debate in dance is no longer going to centre on the concrete steps that lead up

to the studio, but on the technical ones that confront the disabled student when he or

she gains access. (2002, p.8)

Now that people with disabilities have gained equality of opportunity through physical access

to locations where dance activities occur, how will full participation be provided?

This paper examines curricula development and assessment in the physically integrated

dance setting with emphasis on the inclusionary pedagogic practice of translation. Translation

183

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

is a key to establishing equitable dance practice while adhering to ADA requirements. Detailed

guidelines are provided for creating successful movement, spatial, and temporal translations

to facilitate a meaningful physically integrated dance experience for all participants. Readers

can gain insight into developing anatomically sound movement vocabulary for dancers with

disabilities in relation to their non-disabled peers. Best practices in developing assessment

criteria in the physically integrated dance setting are examined with emphasis on the

relationship of movement, spatial, and temporal translations to assessment standards.

This article is based in part on the author’s 20 year professional relationship with the

Dancing Wheels Company & School (as a dancer, choreographer, rehearsal director, and artistic

advisor) as well as his MFA research at the University of California, Irvine. The research blended

artistic and scientific disciplines in the development of an inclusive modern dance curriculum

for dancers with physical disabilities, their non-disabled peers, and teachers. The curriculum

encompasses the following components:

• Existing training methods within the Dancing Wheels Company & School:

Since 1980, the training methods developed and refined by the Dancing Wheels

Company & School have contributed to the aesthetic of the Company and provide an

essential framework for the training of new dancers entering the Company and School.

• Modern dance concepts and principles:

The curriculum’s modern dance concepts and principles are generally accepted within

the modern dance community and shared among various modern dance techniques

and ideologies. These principles are expanded upon by Jowitt (1998) and include the

following: use of breath as an initiator and supporter of movement; the core body as

a center for movement and expressivity; movement of the spine from the vertical axis;

emphasis on the pull of gravity and use of weight; and, successional movement, floor

work and rebound and suspension.

• Review of scientific research regarding the physiological parameters of wheelchair

users:

Scientific researchers have tended to ignore dancers with disabilities, however many

researchers have focused their quantitative studies on wheelchair users who are

184

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

non-dancers, including wheelchair athletes and members of the general population.

These studies contain a wealth of information on such topics as wheelchair propulsion

patterns, muscle recruitment during wheelchair propulsion, incidence and prevalence

of impingement injuries and muscular pain for wheelchair users, wheelchair “wheelie”

balance strategies, and physiological parameters of wheelchair athletes and non-

athletes. This information has been adapted and applied to the inclusive modern

dance curriculum to enhance technical proficiency and promote appropriate physical

engagement for wheelchair users.

• Results from physiological testing and biomechanical motion analysis of a professional

wheelchair dancer:

A first-of-its-kind case study examined physiological parameters and biomechanical

motion analysis of a professional wheelchair dancer from the Dancing Wheels

Company. The results of the case study allow for an increased understanding of body

and wheelchair mechanics in relation to dance specific movement.

• Interviews of current and former dancers from the Dancing Wheels Company & School:

The author individually interviewed twelve current and former dancers (with and

without disabilities) from the Dancing Wheels Company & School regarding such topics

as learning style preference, receiving feedback, sequence of movement vocabulary

during class, and class size. Response to physical discomfort during class and the

relationship between the dancer with a physical disability and his or her wheelchair was

also investigated.

• Consultation with a physical therapist:

A physical therapist with clinical experience in neurologic and orthopedic rehabilitation,

sports medicine and pediatrics, as well as extensive experience in working with dancers

with disabilities, served as consultant on the development of training materials.

The physical therapist shared perspectives on appropriateness and effectiveness of

movement vocabulary developed for wheelchair users.

185

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

Terminology

Terminology within the Dancing Wheels culture, as in the culture at large, transforms

and adjusts with time. Basic terminology developed for ease of description and equality for

all participants. Regarding physical disabilities, a person using a wheelchair or seated (with

or without disabilities), is referred to as a “sit-down dancer.” A person standing, either a non-

disabled dancer or a dancer with a physical disability who may be using crutches is referred to

as a “stand-up dancer.” This approach, in accordance with Elin and Boswell’s (2004), serves to

“de-emphasizes specific disability terms and to underscore functional capacity” (p. 6).

Translation

Translation is the primary tool used in the Dancing Wheels training method to facilitate

physically integrated dance practice while acknowledging individuality. Translation is a tool

that enables sit-down and stand-up dancers to learn together. Physically integrated dance

companies, community groups, and individuals may work with different types of translation

in different ways and it may be referred to as “adaption,” “adaptation,” or “transposition,”

depending on the practitioner. In the Dancing Wheels training method, the definition of

translation is expanded upon that of Whatley (2007), as follows:

Translation is a pedagogic tool in which the elements of movement, space, and time

are manipulated in order to focus on the anatomical purpose of a movement with the

intention of providing an equitable movement experience to all participants, disabled or

non-disabled. The practice of translation encourages dancers to identify the intention/

goal of a movement and work toward achieving that intention/goal through appropriate

physical engagement, individual exploration, and community building activities.

Within the Dancing Wheels training method, translation is referred to as being either

direct (the same use of the elements of movement, space, and time shared between dancers)

or indirect (different use of the elements of movement, space, and time shared between

dancers). While this text focuses on translation between dancers with and without disabilities,

translation can be used as a tool to share movement vocabulary among all dancers, as well as

to enhance decision-making abilities and improvisation skills in any dance setting. Translations

186

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

in the Dancing Wheels training method blend aesthetic considerations with scientific research

regarding the physiological parameters of wheelchair users, thus ensuring appropriate physical

engagement for populations of varying abilities. Before specific movement vocabulary is

examined, an overview of movement, spatial, and temporal translation is provided.

Movement Translation

Direct Movement Translation refers to movement that is possible for both dancers with

and without disabilities to execute in the same manner. An example may include isolations of

the head and neck. An Indirect Movement Translation refers to a movement that cannot be

directly translated either from the sit-down dancer to the stand-up dancer or from the stand-

up dancer to the sit-down dancer in the same manner. A reach of the right leg forward is an

example of a movement initiated by a stand-up dancer that might be indirectly translated by

a sit-down dancer as a reach of the right arm forward. A wheelchair wheelie (a balance on the

rear wheels of the wheelchair) is an example of a movement initiated by a sit-down dancer that

might be indirectly translated by a stand-up dancer as a balance on the balls of his or her feet.

Direct and indirect movement translation often occurs at the same time. For example,

there will almost always be an indirect movement translation between the legs of the stand-

up dancer and the legs of the sit-down dancer (the exception being if the stand-up dancer is

seated and not using her or his legs). Therefore, it is possible (and quite probable) that the

stand-up and sit-down dancer will experience direct movement translation in the upper body

while experiencing indirect movement translation in the lower body.

Movement translation aids in the facilitation of all participants working towards the

same movement goal. Spatial and temporal translations will occur as a natural consequence of

employing movement translation and vice-versa. In short, one element of translation cannot be

used without involving the other elements.

Spatial Translation

The direction in which a wheelchair can move is either forward or backward on a straight

or curved path. This presents one need for the use of spatial translation. For example, if both

a stand-up and sit-down dancer are facing front and locomoting (traveling) forward side-by-

side, they are utilizing a direct spatial translation as they are both following parallel paths in

187

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

space. However, if the movement sequence requires the stand-up and sit-down dancers to

locomote to the right side while maintaining the body facing forward, the sit-down dancer will

need to turn her or his wheelchair a quarter turn to the right, thus changing body direction and

implementing an indirect spatial translation.

Indirect spatial translation may also be used to modify spatial patterns based on level

of spinal cord injury, type of wheelchair, and physiology of the dancer. For instance, a spatial

pattern may need to be adjusted for a power wheelchair user if his or her wheelchair has a low

speed setting. The low-speed setting may not allow the dancer to reach the same points in

space within the movement sequence at the same time as his or her peers. Since the elements

of space and time are interrelated, temporal translation also comes into play in this scenario.

Temporal Translation

Tempo may be altered during dance class based on requirements of the movement

sequence (quick jumps versus sustained carriage of the arms or legs) or experience level of

participants (beginning students may need to perform certain movement sequences at a more

moderate pace than advanced students). Teachers of the physically integrated dance class may

also need to manipulate the element of time through the use of temporal translation. For sit-

down dancers, elements of timing are linked to physiological parameters, type of wheelchair

(standard, lightweight, ultra-lightweight), and wheelchair configuration (including tire pressure,

axle placement, and camber of the rear wheels). All of these factors play a role in determining

how quickly the wheelchair will respond to propulsion (Beekman & Porter, 1999; Bonninger

& Baldwin, 2000; Sawatzky & Kim, 2004). The teacher in the physically integrated setting will

need to take these factors into consideration when planning class material, maintain flexibility

in setting timing elements, and use direct and indirect temporal translation as needed.

Direct temporal translation occurs when sit-down and stand-up dancers execute a

movement using the same timing parameters. For example, both dancers reach right arms to

the side at shoulder height in two counts then lower the arms in two counts. Indirect temporal

translation is used when a direct temporal translation is either not possible or not desired

for the particular movement vocabulary. Turning sequences offer an example of how indirect

188

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

temporal translation may be implemented. During a sequence in which a stand-up dancer is

executing a pirouette on one leg, he will most likely be able to turn faster than his sit-down

counterpart due to the fact he has a smaller point of contact with the floor during the turn

(usually the ball of one foot). The sit-down dancer has four points of contact with the floor (two

front casters and two back wheels), which will result in a slower velocity of turn and the need for

an indirect temporal translation during the turn.

Interconnecting Movement, Spatial, and Temporal Translations

The following four-count phrase illustrates the interconnectedness of movement, spatial,

and temporal translations:

A stand-up and a sit-down dancer face front and raise both arms overhead in two

counts. The subsequent two counts call for the stand-up and sit-down dancer to

execute a quarter turn to the right while keeping the arms overhead. This movement

is impossible for the sit-down dancer to execute with his arms remaining overhead as

he needs to grasp the push rims to facilitate the quarter turn to the right. The sit-down

dancer must lower the arms at some point during the phrase – possibly on the “&”

count after the first two counts – turn the wheelchair a quarter turn to the right, and

then raise the arms back overhead. In lowering the arms to the push rims to manipulate

the wheelchair, the sit-down dancer employs an indirect temporal and movement

translation. Turning the wheelchair a quarter turn to the right facilitates a direct spatial

translation as both dancers will end up facing the right side of the room.

When planning material for class, the teacher is advised to concentrate on movement

translation first, as spatial and temporal translation will naturally result from movement choices.

Teachers must assess the ability of all participants and create appropriate vocabulary

for everyone while maintaining the pace of the class. While these practices are required for any

dance teacher in any discipline, teachers in the physically integrated dance setting must adapt

them to a student population with a broad range of physical abilities.

The following guidelines, which expand upon the recommendations of Nilsen and

Darbyshire (1995), can aid in the creation and implementation of successful movement, spatial,

and temporal translations.

189

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

• Communicate privately and in advance. It is not required for a person with a disability

to disclose their disability or illness; however, in communicating with your students

(with and without disabilities) before class, you may inquire if there are any issues

the students would like to share that may affect their performance in class. This

communication could be verbal or in the form of a written or online questionnaire.

• Allow for additional class preparation time when including translations. The amount of

time required will vary depending on the level of experience of instructor and dancers,

size of class, and overall objectives(s) of the class.

• Understand the movement characteristics of your students in relation to their

disabilities to aid in the development of translations.

• Develop and set movement vocabulary for the dancer with the disability first. Partially

from lack of access to training, there is a scarcity of dance teachers with disabilities.

Often, movement vocabulary is created by the non-disabled teacher for the non-

disabled dancer and the dancer with a disability is left to create translations on his/

her own. Developing vocabulary for the dancer with a disability first fosters equitability

and provides the opportunity for the non-disabled dancer to create and develop new

movement vocabulary based on indirect movement translation.

• Base the translation of a specific exercise on the goal(s)/intention(s) of that exercise,

not on the notion that the sit-down dancer has to mimic the shape or gesture of

the stand-up dancer. Is the goal of the exercise to develop rhythmic awareness,

spatial patterning, aerobic endurance, body shaping or another desired objective?

Understanding the goal of the exercise and communicating it in advance helps

students better understand the translation and prepares them for developing

translations of their own.

• Remember that some movement vocabulary and directional changes that may feel

“natural” to a stand-up dancer are based on opposition of the upper and lower

body (i.e. the cross-lateral opposition found in walking). A sit-down dancer will not

necessarily be able to rely on the information provided by cross lateral opposition of

the upper and lower body to learn or retain movement vocabulary.

190

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

• Observe how students with and without disabilities naturally interpret or translate

a movement when they are presented with new movement vocabulary. Using

student input can aid in developing effective translations and encourages creative

collaboration.

• Find an available wheelchair and begin movement experimentation if you are a non-

disabled teacher of students who use wheelchairs. By dancing in a wheelchair, teachers

gain a greater understanding of the wheelchair’s glide, turning radius, and balance. It

is important to note that when non-disabled teachers or dancers train in a wheelchair,

they have additional stability and control by using musculature of the torso and legs

that may not be available for a dancer with a physical disability.

• Comprehend basic wheelchair function, musculoskeletal stresses caused by manual

wheelchair propulsion and efficient propulsion patterns to aid in the creation of

movement translations that stress physical safety, body alignment, and movement

efficiency.

• Provide assignments. Once students become comfortable with translation,

assignments can be given that allow students to develop their own translations. Koch

(n.d.) provided movement descriptions that class participants interpret. An example

includes: (1) reach diagonally forward high while locomoting in a forward direction; (2)

turn in place; and, (3) add a level change while locomoting backwards, etc.

• Explore work between partners/peers to facilitate inventive translation and encourage

classroom communication and collaboration.

• Assess skill level and development to create movement vocabulary that challenges

each dancer. Dancers with disabilities deserve the same right to be challenged, fail,

and succeed as their non-disabled counterparts. Movement translation should be

modified as skill levels increase to ensure physical, cognitive, and artistic development.

In designing movement vocabulary for the physically integrated dance class, instructors

should be cognizant that adult students with disabilities may not have had access to early

dance training. Several factors contribute to a lack of early training including a paucity of

191

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

qualified instructors, non-existent physically integrated dance curricula, and accessibility

issues. Additionally, since the prevalence of disabilities increases with age, many dancers with

disabilities come to the profession later in life (Brault, 2008). People with physical disabilities

who are new to dance as adults are often placed in intermediate or advanced level classes and

pressured to “catch-up” with non-disabled dancers who have been training for years. As with

any student, the instructor must be cognizant of previous dance training, age of participants,

and level of experience (in particular, wheelchair users may have previous experience in

adaptive sports, which can benefit certain aspects of dance training), and adjust exercises and

expectations accordingly.

With forethought and open communication, translation can be a source for invention

and creativity, allowing everyone to work towards a desired movement goal; however,

translations can create isolation and frustration for participants with and without disabilities

when the instructor is not prepared to offer translations or applies them indiscriminately.

Dancers with disabilities may feel singled out if translation is viewed as being “done to them”

or as an afterthought (Koch, n.d.). Koch pointed to the limitation of adaptations (translations):

“My main critique point of the current use of adaptations is, that it is inequitable since it is

usually just offered to or demanded of students with disabilities” (n.d., p. 17-18). Ideally,

movement translation is used in a circuitous manner between instructor and dancers with and

without disabilities, but it should not be expected that students, particularly beginners, will

possess the kinesthetic knowledge, analytic, or creative skills required to translate movement

on their own (Koch, n.d.).

Dancers with and without disabilities alike indicate frustration if the teacher is not

prepared to offer translations. One sit-down dancer noted: “Sometimes classes are more set for

a stand-up and the sit-downs need to translate themselves and I feel that’s unfair. We want to

learn technique just as much as the stand-up does and instead, we are trying to figure out how

to translate” (personal communication, March 2011). Stand-up dancers have also noted the

importance of teacher preparation in regards to translation with one stand-up dancer offering

the following suggestion: “I feel like there is too much emphasis on the stand-ups. The stand-

192

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

ups should be the ones who have to translate it [movement] for themselves because most of

us come from a dance background – we should be able to translate the sit-down’s movement

into our bodies. That should be our challenge as stand-ups” (personal communication,

March 2011).

While movement translation is a valuable tool in the Dancing Wheels training method,

it is not necessarily used in all physically integrated dance settings. Each classroom is different

and every student, with or without disabilities learns differently. Class size and ratio of dancers

with disabilities to dancers without disabilities will affect how and when movement translation

is best applied. While movement translation may naturally evolve into a process whereby

students become contributors and collaborators, it should be stressed that in a physically

integrated dance technique class, responsibility lies with the instructor to develop movement

vocabulary equally for students with and without disabilities.

Learning Styles

Acknowledging the individual learning style of each student requires regular adjustment

to teaching styles and approaches. Learning styles vary widely and will partially depend on the

student’s disability. Some students may exhibit no outward sign of disability but have a hidden

disability or have multiple disabilities (both hidden and visible). While one student may rely on

visual observation as a learning tool, the student with a visual impairment may need to employ

tactile and auditory feedback. Dancing Wheels Company members, both with and without

disabilities, exhibit a wide range of learning styles and preferences with a majority confirming

visual observation and physical repetition as favored modes of learning movement vocabulary

in both classroom and rehearsal settings (personal communication, April, 2011). One dancer

with quadriplegia specifically noted the importance of using the mirror for visual feedback

regarding body placement since he experienced a lack of sensory feedback in the arms and

torso due to level of spinal cord injury (personal communication, March 2011). In addition, an

individual with limited or non-existent sensory function may not be able to rely on the feedback

provided by repetition of a movement, or “muscle memory” to retain movement phrases or

sequencing. In such cases, use of imagery or exploration of the intention behind the movement

193

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

may aid in retention of movement patterns. The broad array of learning styles underscores

the importance of early instructor/student communication to help ensure an inclusive learning

environment for all participants.

Assessment and Translation

Instructors can develop equivalent assessment criteria for both dancers with and

without disabilities in the physically integrated dance technique course. Physical articulation

is realized as one of several essential components in assessment criteria for dance. Teachers

should use the translations they have created as guidelines for the development of assessment

criteria. They should review the goal/intention of the movement/exercise and assess students

on individual progression toward achieving that goal. The rubric in Figure 1 identifies examples

of specific movement vocabulary, the intention/goal of the movement vocabulary, translation of

the movement vocabulary, and assessment criteria based on the intention/goal.

Benjamin’s (2002, p.8-9) criteria for assessment in the inclusive dance setting included

the following:

• The achievement of set and agreed upon physical goals in dance technique

• Demonstrated levels of understanding of dance terminology

• Interpretation and adaption of set material

• Individual performance skills

• Partnering skills

• Communication skills

• Improvisation skills

Assessment criteria will differ with each institution, company, or studio and will vary with age

and experience level of participants. The National Standards for Dance Education provides

rubrics for assessing students grades K-12 at beginning, intermediate, and advanced

levels. These standards can be adapted for students with physical disabilities. Connecting

the intention/goal of the movement vocabulary/exercise to the assessment criteria allows

individualized formative assessment throughout the coursework.

194

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

The Physically Integrated Modern Dance Class

Progression of a physically integrated modern dance class is outlined below and can be

used as a guide for further exploration. It provides information on creating anatomically sound

translations based on the physiological parameters of wheelchair users.

Beginning — Finding Focus

The beginning of class sets the tone for the experience to come. If starting class with

participants lying on the floor, be cognizant that not all sit-down dancers will transfer out of

their wheelchairs. Those who wish to transfer should be invited to do so before the initial rituals

of class begin so they will not feel rushed. Beginning with a simple focus on breath pattern

is a means to unite the class by centering students’ attention (Erkert, 2003). The inherent

movement of breath through the body is a commonality shared by all.

Self-contact at the beginning of class encourages awareness of the entire body and

prepares the dancer for contact with others. Self-contact can range from a light touch to a deep

self-massage and should include areas affected by sensory and/or motor loss. Self-contact can

also include the placing of hands on areas of the body where movement is felt from breathing.

This subtle work at the beginning of class will help students refine their kinetic sense.

Warm-up

Sit-down and stand-up dancers have different needs for warming-up their bodies due to

functional capability. The majority of sit-down dancers in the Dancing Wheels Company prefer

to initially warm-up their shoulders, hands, and wrists (personal communication, April 2011).

The importance of properly warming-up the shoulder is underscored in light of the fact that the

shoulder is the most commonly reported site of injury in manual wheelchair users (Bonninger

& Souza, 2002). An injury to the shoulder could prove extremely detrimental to a person who

uses his or her arms as a primary mode of locomotion. Dancing Wheels’ stand-up dancers

prefer to initially warm-up the core, hips, and lower extremities (personal communication, April

2011). Possible common ground for movement vocabulary that stand-up and sit-down dancers

can share during the warm-up includes exercises that strengthen and stretch the core while

focusing on breath initiation and support. This movement vocabulary can be followed by hip

and shoulder range of motion sequences for the stand-up and sit-down dancers respectively.

195

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

Of particular importance for sit-down dancers in regards to torso warm-up are stretches

that promote the lengthening of the anterior muscles of the torso and shoulder (anterior

deltoid, pectoralis) such as the “high release” movement during a contraction and release

cycle. These stretches serve to counteract the repetitive movement patterns of wheelchair

propulsion and postural adaptations from prolonged periods of sitting.

Legs and Feet — Arms and Hands

After the initial warm-up, focus can be placed on increased articulation of legs and feet

(for the stand-up dancer) and arms and hands (for the sit-down dancer). A multitude of indirect

movement, spatial, and temporal translations are available for sit-down and stand-up dancers

to share; however, teachers of physically integrated dance should not assume that movement

vocabulary for the legs of the stand-up dancer will automatically correspond to movement

vocabulary for the arms of the sit-down dancer. For this reason, translations within the Dancing

Wheels training method are based not solely on aesthetic considerations but also take into

account the physiological parameters of dancers who use wheelchairs. As an example, a stand-

up dancer externally rotates the hips and stretches one leg and foot forward (tendu devant

in ballet terminology) and the sit-down dancer is asked to mimic the gesture of the stand-up

dancer’s leg with her arm. In this instance both dancers may struggle to understand the point

of the movement translation. The exercise can progress beyond the notion of one dancer

imitating another and be embodied with physiological understanding and kinetic sense by

applying a basic understanding of wheelchair propulsion biomechanics. In the tendu devant,

external rotation of the glenohumeral (shoulder) joint of the sit-down dancer is used as a

means to counterbalance the repeated internal rotation of the arm present during wheelchair

propulsion, not as a means to mimic the external rotation of the stand-up dancer’s hips. The

counterbalance of this external rotation facilitates muscular balance and potentially decreases

shoulder injury (Kulig & Newsam, 2001; Mulroy & Farrokhi, 2004). The above example enables

sit-down and stand-up dancers to share direct spatial and temporal translations (facilitating

community building through unison use of space and time) with indirect movement translations

(facilitating appropriate physical engagement).

196

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

Foot/ankle articulations (for stand-up dancers) and wrist/hand articulations (for sit-

down dancers) increase dexterity and can take place concurrently. To reiterate, the sit-down

dancer does not perform these exercises as a means of mimicking the stand-up dancer;

the mobilization of wrists and hands through flexion, extension, and stretching develops

strength and articulation while preparing the sit-down dancer for more strenuous movement

vocabulary to come. Mobilizing the wrist may also be a means to help prevent carpal tunnel

syndrome (compression of the median nerve which runs from the forearm to the hand) which

has been found to be prevalent in 40 to 66 percent of manual wheelchair users (Montgomery,

1998; National Institute of Neurological Disorders and Stroke, 2010; Paralyzed Veterans of

America, 2005).

Locomotor Combinations

Combinations across the floor begin with locomotor sequences that increase in tempo,

range of motion, and spatial design and complexity. These sequences will use a variety of

direct and indirect spatial, temporal, and movement translations. The following locomotor

combination for the sit-down dancer includes a translation for the stand-up dancer and

assessment criteria based on the intention/goal of the exercise:

Four Count Propulsion with Contraction and High Release

Counts 1 -& Full push forward with both arms. The hands release from the push rims

to the front as the torso contracts. The arms move through a rounded

position to the front and continue upward.

Count 2 Arms continue to travel front and overhead as the torso moves to an

upright position.

Count 3 Execute a high release of the upper torso as the arms continue to circle

back, rotating from the shoulder joint to allow the palms to face the floor.

Counts 4 -& Arms lower and hands return to the push rims as the upper torso returns

to the upright starting position.

Repeat until across the floor. After the initial push, the arms maintain a continuous

motion until they return to the push rims on count four. The four-count push with contraction

197

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

and high release can be executed with one arm for dancers with balance issues and for power

wheelchair users operating a joy stick, or without the arm movement with focus placed on the

breath pattern during the contraction and release cycle.

Intention/Goal

Attention to breath pattern during contraction and release of the torso while

maintaining forward locomotion/momentum on a direct pathway.

Translation

The four-count propulsion with contraction and high release combines direct movement

translation of the upper body and indirect movement translation of the lower body with direct

temporal and spatial translations. Stand-up dancers begin with the hips externally rotated. Legs

bend during the first two steps with the torso in contraction followed by a rise on the balls of

the feet with straight legs for the second two steps with the torso in high release.

Assessment

Student connects breath pattern to contraction and release cycle while locomoting

through space on a direct pathway.

Small Jump Combinations

Small jump combinations are an excellent way for stand-up and sit-down dancers

to practice rhythmic awareness, physical articulation, control, speed, stamina, and unison

movement. Repeated wheelie bumps (or transient wheelies) for sit-down dancers in which a

wheelie is popped but the wheelie balance point is not reached can be indirectly translated as

small jumps for stand-up dancers. Sit-down dancers who cannot achieve a wheelie bump due

to wheelchair configuration or physiological parameters can use indirect movement translation

for small jumps in the following ways:

• Hand claps or rhythmic taps of the thighs or wheelchair on the downbeat of the music

or as the stand-up dancer lands from her or his jump.

• Triceps extension: with arms at sides and palms facing front (externally rotating the

shoulder joint), reach the arms into backspace while contracting the triceps. Arms

reach back on the downbeat of the music or as the stand-up dancer lands from her or

his jump.

198

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

• Weight relief lift: grasp the push rims and wheels or arms rests and push downward,

lifting the buttocks off the seat rest while contracting the triceps and pressing down

with the scapulas. Lower the buttocks to the seat rest on the downbeat of the music or

as the stand-up dancer lands from her or his jump.

Movement Combinations

A movement combination may be presented before, after, or instead of a large

jump combination. These larger combinations often incorporate movement vocabulary

and sequences presented earlier in class (Erkert, 2003). The movement combination should

reflect the overall goal of the entire class (i.e. working with uneven meters or attention to

spatial patterning).

Large Jump Combinations

Large jump combinations provide an opportunity for stand-up and sit-down dancers

to focus on lengthening the head-tail connection while extending energy from core to distal

limbs and beyond. Large jump combinations often travel through space and involve the sit-

down dancer generating speed and momentum via propulsion. Teachers should be aware

that maximum propulsion speeds differ depending on students’ disabilities. Sprint tests

involving wheelchair athletes and sedentary individuals have shown low values of power output

for individuals with cerebral palsy and cervical spinal cord injury (Van der Woude & Veeger,

2001), and varied values depending on other levels of spinal cord injury (Kulig & Newsam,

ent goal of the exercise and plan groupings

emporal considerations, spatial patterning,

st appropriate groupings of dancers for large

2001). Teachers should decide the main movem

of dancers to perform the exercise accordingly. T

or movement dynamics will often decide the mo

jump and locomotor sequences.

Cool Down

An appropriate cool down for modern dance class, physically integrated or otherwise,

varies depending on the goals of the class and the specific movement vocabulary performed

within the class (Erkert, 2003). If the class includes several small and large jump combinations

for the stand-up dancers and rapid propulsion for the sit-down dancers, stretching of the lower

199

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

and upper body respectively might be in order. Stretching should be approached in a gentle

manner, particularly at the end of class when the muscle-tendon complex may already be

fatigued (Deighan, 2005).

Class Ending

A shared breathing pattern repeated from the beginning of class offers the opportunity

to re-focus energy and engage students as a community for one final moment. Since working

in a physically integrated dance setting may be a new experience for all participants, including

the teacher, a short discussion regarding the experience of the participants may be in order.

This is also a way for teachers to gauge effectiveness of movement vocabulary and translations

introduced during class.

Conclusion

The training methods outlined in this article merge artistic and scientific disciplines

to provide practical guidelines for teachers of students with and without physical disabilities,

while facilitating safe and effective dance practice for wheelchair users. Although these

training methods were created to be as comprehensive as possible, full participation in the

arts for people with disabilities will not be possible solely through one method, technique, or

ideology. It is through the recognition, support, and collaboration of multiple artists, advocates,

and disciplines that full participation will be realized. Further artistic and scientific research is

required to continue the development of dance training practices for people with disabilities

that equal those available to their non-disabled counterparts. Additional research could spark

a proliferation of not only dancers with disabilities, but also dance teachers, choreographers,

directors, and arts managers.

Enhancing opportunities for people with disabilities in dance has the potential to

benefit the entire dance field by expanding the range of artistic possibilities not only for

dancers with disabilities, but also for non-disabled dancers, teachers, and choreographers.

This broadened spectrum of artistic possibilities can push the boundaries of what dance is and

can be, while altering the perception of what is possible for a person with a disability in our

200

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

society. As the boundaries of “dance” (the art form), and “physically integrated dance” (the

field) continue to shift, merge, and be redefined, there is a singular need to offer equality of

opportunity and full participation in all dance forms to people of all abilities.

References

Beekman, C. & Porter, L. (1999). Energy cost of propulsion in standard and ultralight

wheelchairs in people with spinal cord injuries. Physical Therapy, 79(2), 146-158.

Benjamin, A. (2002). Making an Entrance: Theories and Practice for Disabled and Non-

Disabled Dancers. New York, NY: Routledge.

Bonninger, M. & Baldwin, M. (2000). Manual wheelchair pushrim biomechanics and axle

position. Archives of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, 81, 608-613.

Bonninger, M. & Souza, A. (2002). Propulsion patterns and pushrim biomechanics in manual

wheelchair propulsion. Archives of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, 83, 718-723.

Brault, M. (2008). Americans with Disabilities: 2005, Household Economic Studies. Washington,

D.C. U.S. Department of Commerce Economics and Statistics Administration, U.S.

Census Bureau. Retrieved from http://www.census.gov/prod/2008pubs/p70-117.pdf

Deighan, M. (2005). Flexibility in dance. Journal of Dance Medicine & Science, 9(1), 13-17.Elin,

J. & Boswell, B. (2004.) Re-envisioning Dance: Perceiving the Aesthetics of Disability.

Dubuque, IA: Kendall/Hunt.

Erkert, J. (2003). Harnessing the Wind: The Art of Teaching Modern Dance, Champaign, IL:

Human Kinetics.

Jowitt, D (1998). Modern Dance Technique. In International Encyclopedia of Dance. (Vol. 4. pp.

437-443). New York, NY: Oxford University Press.

Koch, J. (n.d.) Find your own pace and move together. The application of Principles of Universal

Design of Instruction in Dance Degrees in Higher Education. Unpublished article based

on Koch, J. (2009) Workshop: Ready, set, un-set. Paper presented at Congress on

Research in Dance (CORD) Special Topics Conference, De Montford University, UK.

201

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

Kulig, K. & Newsam, C. (2001). The effect of spinal cord injury on joint kinetics during manual

wheelchair propulsion. Clinical Biomechanics, 16, 744-751.

Montgomery, K. (1998). End Your Carpal Tunnel Pain Without Surgery: A Daily Program to

Prevent and Treat Carpal Tunnel Syndrome. Nashville, TN: Rutledge Hill Press.

Mulroy, S. & Farrokhi, S. (2004). Effects of spinal cord injury level on the activity of shoulder

muscles during wheelchair propulsion: an electromyographic study. Archives of Physical

Medicine and Rehabilitation, 85, 925-934.

National Institute of Neurological Disorders and Stroke (2010). Carpal Tunnel Syndrome Fact

Sheet. Retrieved from: http://www.ninds.nih.gov/disorders/carpal_tunnel/detail_carpal_

tunnel.htm#170503049.

Nilsen, S. & Darbyshire, C. (1995). Investigating inclusive teaching practice. Stine Nilsen and

Charlotte Darbyshire.

Paralyzed Veterans of America. (2005). Preservation of Upper Limb Function Following Spinal

Cord Injury: A Clinical Practice Guideline for Health-Care Professionals.

Sawatzky, B. & Kim, W (2004). The ergonomics of different tyres and tyre pressure during

wheelchair propulsion. Ergonomics, 47(14), 1475-1483.

United States Department of Justice (2009). Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, as

Amended. Retrieved from: http://www.ada.gov/pubs/adastatute08.htm.

Van der Woude, L. & Veeger, H. (2001). Biomechanics and physiology in active manual

wheelchair propulsion. Medical Engineering and Physics, 23, 713-733.

Whatley, S. (2007). Dance and disability: the dancer, the viewer, and the presumption of

difference. Research in Dance Education, 8(1), 5-25.

202

DEVELOPING CURRICULA AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS

Figure 1. Movement Rubric

Movement Vocabulary

Intention/Goal Translation(s) Assessment Criteria

Contraction and release of the torso

Connection of breath pattern to contraction and release cycle

All dancers: exhale upon contraction of torso and inhale upon release of torso. Sit-down dancers may grasp wheelchair frame or push-rims for added stability.

Student breath pattern is connected to the contraction and release cycle with allowances made for range of motion of the torso based on functional capacity.

Sustained wheelie Balance For sit-down dancer: a full wheelie (front casters held off the floor) or depending on functional ability and wheelchair configuration, a balance without a wheelie with one or two arms reaching front, side or overhead.For stand-up dancer: balance on one or two feet.

Student maintains a sustained balance based on her or his functional ability.

Wheelie bumps (or transient wheelies) in which a wheelie is popped but the wheelie balance point is not reached and the casters are tapped repetitively on the floor.

Rhythmic acuity (identify downbeat of music and maintain a consistent rhythm).

For sit-down dancer:Wheelie bumps or:• Hand claps or rhythmic taps of the thighs on the downbeat of the music.• Triceps extension: Arms reach back on the downbeat of the music.• Weight relief lift: lift the buttocks off the seat rest of the wheelchair. Lower the buttocks to the seat rest on the downbeat of the music.For stand-up dancer: Continuous small jumps in 1st position.

Student identifies the downbeat of the music and maintains a consistent rhythm.

DAVID M. RUBENSTEIN, CHAIRMANMICHAEL M. KAISER, PRESIDENT

DARRELL M. AYERS, VICE PRESIDENT, EDUCATIONOffice of VSA and Accessibility2700 F Street, NW

Washington, DC 20566(202) 416-8898

[email protected]